Home

Boss Audio Systems GS-10 Musical Instrument User Manual

1. c aoe PHONES GUITAR BASS Receiving Control Change Messages You can control specified parameters during a performance by having the GS 10 receive Control Change messages ven Parameters to be controlled are set with Assign p 60 Receiving Data The GS 10 can receive data transmitted from another GS 10 as well as data that s been stored on a sequencer 68 Chapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected Making the Settings for MIDI Functions Here is a description of the GS 10 s MIDI functions Set them as needed depending on the intended use Press SYSTEM a number of times until the following screen appears eg Press PARAMETER B so that the parameter that you want to set appears in the display SS Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to change the setting s value gt Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as needed d Press EXIT to return to the Play screen RX Channel Receive Channel Valid Settings 1 16 This sets the MIDI channel used for receiving MIDI messages This is set to 1 when shipped from the factory Omni Mode Valid Settings Omni Off Omni On When set to Omni On messages are received on all channels regardless of the MIDI channel settings Even when Omni Mode is set to ON the only Exclusive messages received are for Device ID data set with Device ID
2. Cancel 133 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows 15 Verify that BOSS GS 10 is displayed and click Finish Driver installation will begin When driver installation has been completed the System Settings Change dialog box will appear System Settings Change X 2 You must restart your computer before the new settings will take effect Do you want to restart your computer now 9 e 16 Click Yes Windows will restart automatically Next you need to make the driver settings p 141 134 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows Windows Me 98 users With the GS 10 disconnected start up Windows Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse if used Exit all currently running software applications Also close any open windows If you are using virus checking or similar software be sure to exit it as well Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of your computer Click the Windows start button From the menu that appears select Run Open the Run dialog box In the dialog box that appears input the following into the Open field and click OK D DRIVER USB_ME98 SETUPINF EXE The drive name D may be different for your system Specify the drive name of your CD ROM drive Open DADRIVERSUSB MESENSETUPINF EXE 2 x Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows
3. The SetupInf dialog box will appear with Ready to install the driver appearing in the box SetupInf x 5 el Ready to install the driver Please use a USB cable to connect the GS 10 and your computer and then turn on the power of the GS 10 The Insert Disk dialog box will appear Click the OK button The Files Needed dialog box will appear so inputthe name ofthe folder containing the driver DADRIVERIUSB_KP2k into the Copy files from area and perform the installation NOTE After inputting the folder name click the OK button in the dialog box Turn on power to your various The setup program will finish devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing 10 Before connecting the USB cable switch the GS 10 s driver mode to Advanced malfunction and or damage to For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 other devices 11 with the power switch turned OFF use the USB cable to connect the GS 10 to MEMO yourcomputer This unit is equipped with a 12 Make sure that the GS 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL is set to the lowest setting then protection circuit A brief switch ON the POWER switch interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally If the File signature verification setting in step 4 was not set to Ienore a Digital Signature Not Found dialog box will app
4. When you are finished making settings close the Sound dialog box 7 FromtheFile menu select Quit vote If USB audio is not displayed close the Sound dialog box and disconnect the GS 10 s USB cable from the Macintosh Perform the driver installation p 157 once again 159 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh Mac OS X users With the GS 10 disconnected start up Mac OS Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse if used Exit all currently running software applications Also close any open windows If you are using virus checking or similar software be sure to exit it as well Before connecting the USB cable switch the GS 10 s driver mode to Standard For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 With the power switch turned OFF use the USB cable to connect the GS 10 to your computer Make sure that the GS 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL is set to the lowest setting then switch ON the POWER switch Open System Preferences and click Sound r pu eo System Preferences mae a Show All Displays Sound Network Startup Disk Personal E aa cC dl 1 SN My Account Desktop Dock Genera i International Login Items Screen Effects Hardware m CDs amp DVDs ColorSync Displays Energy Keyboard Mouse Sound er Internet amp Network Internet Networ k QuickTime Sharing d Sy
5. fan operation involving a heavy processing load is performed while the GS 10 is in use it may not operate correctly If this occurs stop playback recording and then try resuming playback recording If you are still unable to play back record exit all applications that use the GS 10 switch off the GS 10 then turn it on again Windows Recording produces a silent blank file _1 Try setting the bit rate to 16 bit or higher Ifyou are using Windows 98 Second Edition and your recording software is set to a bit rate setting of 8 bits a silent file may be created effectively making recording impossible If this occurs set the bit rate to 16 bit or higher and you will be able to record normally J Is the Recording source select switch set correctly J In your operating system is the audio data input destination set correctly J On your recording software is the audio data input destination set correctly Windows Game background music does not play _1 Does the game use an audio CD for background music Standard driver mode Ifthe game uses an audio CD for background music refer to When playing audio CDs from the computer s internal CD ROM drive or using the GS 10 to play game music p 145 Windows Macintosh Sound becomes distorted or noisy when you apply an effect Adjust the volume of the effects Windows Macintosh A loud buzz is present in the guitar signal LJ
6. A dialog box like the one shown below will appear Add New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for new drivers in its driver database on your hard drive and in any of the following selected locations Click Next to start the search Floppy disk drives Fssensrenenssnenenenneensessened Microsoft Windows Update Specify a location C WINDOWS CATROOT lt Back Cancel 138 vote Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to other devices MEM This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows 8 9 Check CD ROM drive and click Next A dialog box like the one shown below will appear Add New Hardware Wizard Windows has found an updated driver for this device and also some other drivers that should work with this device teren Pind MERE lt Back Cancel Click Next File driver copying will begin If the Windows CD ROM is not inserted in the CD ROM drive a Insert Disk dialog box may appear In this case insert the Windows CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and click OK Insert Disk e Please insert the disk labeled Windows 98 Second Edition CD ROM and then click OK When installation o
7. USB Device or USB composite device displayed below Sound Video and Game Controllers Other Devices or Universal Serial Bus Controller y If you find any such indication select it and click Delete 7 Adialog box will ask you to confirm deletion of the device Verify the contents of the dialog box and then click OK In the same way delete all indications of Composite USB Device USB Device USB Device and USB composite device that you find If you find BOSS GS 10 with a yellow or a red displayed beside it delete this in the same way 8 When you have finished deleting the unwanted devices click OK in the System Properties dialog box 9 Turn off the power of the GS 10 then delete the driver Deleting the special driver p 173 1O Restart Windows Then install the driver once again Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows p 126 fthe problem still occurs after you have taken the above measures please refer also to the Readme file for the USB driver The Readme file is on the CD ROM Macintosh A dialog box says Can t use driver required by USB device BOSS GS 10 L Special driver mode Are you using only audio You must install the MIDI driver even if you are using the GS 10 only with audio Please install the GS 10 driver for OMS or FreeMIDI Installing the special driver p 146 Problems when using the USB dr
8. AUTO m SEMI TER AUTO Wi ANCER TONE MODIFY SLOW GEAR ADV COMP TREMOLO Maya 2x2 CHORUS RUN ANIZER PAN FLANGER HARMONIST VIBRATO PITCH SHIFTER e UNI V OCTAVE ROTARY PEDALBEND SHORT DELAY Display A variety of information about the GS 10 appears here Normally patch names are displayed PREAMP SPEAKER p 21 p 28 Preamp Speaker Simulator GAIN Knob Adjusts the degree of preamp distortion BASS Knob Adjusts the sound quality of the preamp s low frequency range MIDDLE Knob Adjusts the sound quality of the preamp s midrange TREBLE Knob Adjusts the sound quality of the preamp s high frequency range PRESENCE Knob Adjusts the sound quality in the preamp s ultra high frequency range LEVEL Knob Adjusts the preamp volume level PREAMP SPEAKER On Off Button Press to change the settings CHANNEL SELECT Button Switches the preamp channel PATCH VALUE c WRITE c CJ GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM with USB AUDIO INTERFACE AUX INPUT OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL D rae a METER CI DIRECT PATCH 1 2 3 4 SPEAKER IST GUITAR BASS 09 COMP Compressor p 21 p 31 SUSTAIN Knob Adjusts the compressor s sustain effect an effect that keeps the sound playing COMP On Off Button Press to change the settings OD DS p 21 p 32 Overdrive Distortion DRIVE Knob Adjusts the degree of overdri
9. 00 12 kk kk 00 13 Kk kk 00 14 00 15 kk kk 00 16 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Patch 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F Data H 00 01 00 0A 00 09 00 64 00 64 00 01 00 01 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 71 00 64 00 64 00 0C 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 02 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 02 Name 1 Name 2 Name 12 Name Name Nr Name 12 Name Name Nr Name 12 Name Name Nr Name 12 Name Name Ne Name 12 FX1 0n Off FX1 FX Select PW Type PW Pdl Position PW Level AW Mode AW Polarity AW Sensitivity AW Frequency AW Peak AW Rate AW Depth AW Level TM Type TM Low TM High TM Level ACS Type ACS Sustain ACS Attack ACS Tone ACS Level LM Type Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer to Table Name to Table Name to Table Name to Table Name to Table Name Description P
10. Assign 1 8 L Do the MIDI channel settings of both devices match Make sure that the MIDI channels of both devices match p 69 J Do the controller number settings of both devices match Make sure that the controller number of both devices match p 70 MIDI messages are not transmitted received _1 Are the MIDI cables broken Try another set of MIDI cables J Is the GS 10 correctly connected to the other MIDI device Check connections with the other MIDI device L Do the MIDI channel settings of both devices match Make sure that the MIDI channels of both devices match p 69 L When you send messages from the GS 10 make sure the GS 10 is set to the settings appropriate for sending data Check the on off status for transmission of program change messages and the settings for the controller numbers to be transmitted p 70 The GS 10 cannot be controlled with the MIDI controller connected to the MIDI IN connector LJ Are you connected via USB Ifthe GS 10 is connected via USB with the driver mode set to Advanced messages to MIDI IN are transmitted to the computer via USB Disconnect the USB cable Windows Meent Problems common to Windows and Macintosh Windows Problems occurring only in Windows Macintosh Problems occurring only in Macintosh Problems related to the USB driver Windows An Unknown driver found dialog box appears and y
11. In MIDI performance information such as playing a key or pressing a pedal are transmitted as MIDI Messages How MIDI messages are transmitted and received First we will explain briefly how MIDI messages are transmitted and received MIDI connectors The following types of connector are used to convey MIDI messages MIDI cables are connected to these connectors as t oY MIDI OUT IN This connector receives messages from an other MIDI device MIDI OUT This connector transmits messages from this device needed This connector re transmits the messages ide that were received at MIDI IN The GS 10 features both MIDI IN and MIDI OUT connectors MIDI channels MIDI is able to independently control more than one MIDI device over a single MIDI cable This is possible because of the concept of MIDI channels The idea of MIDI channels is somewhat similar to the idea of television channels By changing channels on a television set you can view a variety of programs This is because the information of a particular channel is received when the channels of the transmitter and receiver match T V information from many different broadcasting station is Broadcasting _ sent through an antena Station A Broadcasting Station B Broadcasting __ StationC Select the channel of the broadcasting station you wish to watch MIDI has sixteen channels 1 16 and MIDI messages will be received by the ins
12. 00 XX 41 01 7F 7F SEQ High EQ SEO Level DD On Off DD Type DD DlyTime DD DlyTime F DD Tap Time DD Feedback DD High Cut Filter DD Effect Level CE On Off CE Mode CE Rate CE Depth CE Pre Delay CE Low Cut Filter CE High Cut Filter CE Effect Level RV 0n 0ff RV Type RV Reverb Time RV Pre Delay RV Low Cut Filter RV High Cut Filter RV Density RV Effect Level Patch Level Master BPM NS On Off NS Threshold NS Release FV Level Input Select Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain 10 Chain 11 Chain 12 VO 00 120Y UI 4 CO NO S Name 1 Name 2 Name 16 ASSIGN 1 0n Off ASSIGN 1 Target ASSIGN 1 Target Min ASSIGN 1 Target Max ASSIGN 1 Source ASSIGN 1 Source Mode ASSIGN 1 Source Act Range Low ASSIGN 1 Source Act Range High 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 00 Off 01 On 00 Single 01 Pan 02 Stereo Refer to Table 0 20ms 0 100 0 100 Refer to Table 0 120 00 Off 01 On 00 Mono 01 Stereol 02 Stereo2 Refer to Table 0 100 0 0ms 40 0ms 0 Refer to Table Refer to Table 0 100 00 Off 01 On Refer to Table Appendices DD Delay Time Type Pan High Cut Rate 5ms step Low Cut High Cut Reverb Type 0 1s 10 0s 0 1s step Oms 100ms Refer to Table Refer to Table 0 10 0 100 00 0 01 2 64 200 00 00 40
13. Use the Assign p 60 settings to set the following to one of the Assigns in ASSIGN 1 8 Target TUNER On Off larget Min On Target Max Off CTL1 or CTL2 Mode Toggle Act Range Lo 0 Act Range Hi 1 127 Source Adiusting the Display Contrast LCD Contrast Depending on where the GS 10 is placed the display may become difficult to read If this occurs adjust the display contrast 1 Press SYSTEM a number of times until LCD Contrast is displayed You can also select this by pressing SYSTEM and then pressing PARAMETER ag Be 2 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to adjust the contrast Valid Settings 1 16 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Limiting the Patches That Can Be Switched Patch Extent By setting an upper limit to the patches thus limiting the range of patches that can be switched you can set the GS 10 so that only the patches you need can be selected 1 Press SYSTEM then press PARAMETER lt B so that Patch Extent is displayed 2 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to set the upper limit for the patches Valid Settings U001 U100 P101 P200 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen 65 N o A e 0 N Chapter 7 Convenient Functions and System Settings Keeping the Same Pedal Operations When Switching Patches Assign Hold This setting determines whether or not the Assign s p 60 operational status is carried over to the n
14. e Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of inter ference e This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initi ating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit e When moved from one location to another where the temperature and or humidity is very different water droplets condensation may form inside the unit Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand for several hours until the condensation has completely evaporated Maintenance e For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a
15. 00 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User User NJ F3 H3 ES pa pa p pa pa p pa p p pa p p pa p p pa pa p pa pa p pa pai p pa pai p pa pai p pa pa p pa pa p p p p p pa p pa pa p pa pai p pa pa p pa pa p p pai p p pai p a pai p pa pa p p p p p p p a p p p p s E C UJ UJ UU UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ CJ CJ CJ UJ F Step15 F Step16 AAQAAAAANAANDAADAAAANHDAANA Stepl Step2 Step3 Step4 Step5 Step6 Step Step8 Step9 Step10 Stepll Step12 Step13 Stepl4 Step15 Step16 Stepl Step2 Step3 Step4 Step5 Step6 Step7 Step8 Step9 Step10 Stepll Step12 Step13 Stepl4 Step15 Step16 Stepl Step2 Step3 Step4 Step5 Step6 Step7 Step8 Step9 Step10 Stepll Step12 Step13 Stepl4 Step15 Stepl6 Stepl Step2 Step3 Step4 Step5 Step6 Step7 Step8 Step9 Step10 Stepll Step12 Step13 Stepl4 Step15 Step1
16. 22 Making More Precise Effect Settings 23 Naming WT d i Eee eot bibo deo etas 24 Changing the Connection Order of Effects ee RE CHAI e HR 24 Chapter 3 Saving the Tones You Have Created 25 Storing Patches PATCH WRITE 25 Copying Patches oae pna ioo nb Ebert ipe edad 25 Exchanging Patches siiani 26 Initializing Patches uoo iaia 26 Registering Your Favorite Patches DIRECT PATCH niens eene v EE NER IHE E ERE 27 Copying the PREAMP SPEAKER Settings erte eege 27 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters 28 PREAMP SPEAKER Preamp Speaker Simulator 28 COMP Compressor Eege 31 OD DS Overdrive Distortion 32 DEA 33 CHORUS ote ai 34 ENEE 34 EO XEQualizet copo aan 35 o cime 36 PW Pedal beet 36 AW AO WaN nonet rl 36 IM Tone Modil y ariei toe ertet 37 ACS Advanced Compreseor sss 38 EK 38 ENFE Ennancer Lanier 39 DG EE Ahi iaia 39 Eelere ii 39 DE Defreter sanare 40 RM Ring Modulator seria 40 Ree E EE 40 i Col T 41 IPT EE 42 FEHR Er EE 42 HR FAaFmMonsb a elle 43 PS Piter SHer e lalla 44 OC LOCHI E 45 DD eet Bend 45 2CBQ252 e E 45 Eege 46 Eeer beim Verein 46 WIV COIN EEN 47 Re EE 47 SDD SNORE Delay ictu i mter e attese dus 48 AU EFimianizer lea 48 DIS OBCOE E 49 Ee R ilari 49 SIN GUME OYO etus utet plene ate pe
17. 30 Scale 6 B Scale 7 03 00 06 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 06 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 Db 03 00 06 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 D 03 00 06 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 Eb 03 00 06 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 E 03 00 06 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 F 03 00 06 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 F 03 00 06 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 G 03 00 06 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 Ab 03 00 06 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 A 03 00 06 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 Bb 03 00 06 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 7 B Scale 8 03 00 07 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 07 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 Db 03 00 07 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 D 03 00 07 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 Eb 03 00 07 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 E 03 00 07 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 F 03 00 07 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 F 03 00 07 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 G 03 00 07 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 Ab 03 00 07 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 A 03 00 07 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 Bb 03 00 07 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 8 B E Oo D 5 2 le rn 95 Appendices Scale 9 03 00 08 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 08 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 Db 03 00 08 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 D 03 00 08 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 Eb 03 00 08 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 E 03 0
18. 32 User 1 Db Step15 03 01 00 1F 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Stepl6 03 01 00 20 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Stepl Refer to Table AR Step Note 03 01 00 21 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Step2 03 01 00 22 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Step3 03 01 00 23 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Step4 03 01 00 24 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Step5 03 01 00 25 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Step6 03 01 00 26 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Step7 03 01 00 27 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Step8 03 01 00 28 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Step9 03 01 00 29 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Stepl0 03 01 00 2A 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Stepll 03 01 00 2B 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Step12 03 01 00 2C 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Stepl13 03 01 00 2D 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Stepl4 03 01 00 2E 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Stepl5 03 01 00 2F 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 D Stepl6 03 01 00 30 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Stepl Refer to Table AR Step Note 03 01 00 31 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Step2 03 01 00 32 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Step3 03 01 00 33 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Step4 03 01 00 34 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Step5 03 01 00 35 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Step6 03 01 00 36 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Step7 03 01 00 37 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Step8 03 01 00 38 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Step9 03 01 00 39 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Stepl0 03 01 00 3A 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Step11 03 01 00 3B 00 00 00
19. 34 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Rev Time Reverb Time Adjusts the length time of reverberation Pre Delay Adjusts the time until the reverb sound appears Low Cut Low Cut Filter This sets the frequency at which the low cut filter begins to take effect This lets you cut the low end component below the set frequency to create a clear distinct low end thereby bringing out the high end of the effect When Flat is selected the low cut filter will have no effect High Cut High Cut Filter This sets the frequency at which the high cut filter begins to take effect This allows you to get a mild effect sound by cutting the high end component above the set frequency When Flat is selected the high cut filter will have no effect Density This adjusts the density of the reverb sound Effect Level Adjusts the volume of the reverb sound EQ Equalizer Adjusts the tone Parametric control is provided for the high mid range and low mid range Parameter Value On Off Off On Low EQ 20 dB 20 dB Lo Mid f 20 0 Hz 10 0 kHz Lo Mid Q 0 5 16 Lo Mid EQ 20 dB 20 dB Hi Mid f 20 0 Hz 10 0 kHz Hi Mid Q 0 5 16 Hi Mid EQ 20 dB 20 dB High EQ 20 dB 20 dB Level 20 dB 20 dB On Off Effect On Off Switches the EO effect on off Low EQ Low Equalizer Adjusts the low frequency range tone Lo Mid f Low Middle Frequency Specify the center of the frequency range that w
20. JE Setting the External Expression Pedal Functions Expression Pedal Function p 58 Parameter Value Type CRY Wah VO Wah Fat Wah Light Wah 7String Wah Reso Wah Bass Wah Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Pdl Position 0 100 Level 0 100 Type This selects the wah type This models the sound of the CRY BABY Ge wah pedal popular in the 70s VO Wah This models the sound of the VOX V846 FatWah This is a wah sound featuring a bold tone This wah has a refined sound with no un Light Wah Lu usual characteristics 7String Wah Wah featuring a broader range of variations for the seven string guitar This completely original effect offers en hancements on the characteristic resonances produced by analog synth filters When Type Is Set to Custom1 3 You can select the following parameters when type is set to Custom1 3 IS Customizing Pedal Wah p 57 EDIT CUSTOM WAH1 3 Reso Wah Bass Wah Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Parameter Value Type CRY WAH VO WAH Fat WAH Light WAH 7String WAH Q 50 50 Range Low 50 50 Range High 50 450 Presence 50 450 Pdl Position Pedal Position This adjusts the position of the wah pedal Level Adjusts the volume AW Auto Wah This changes the filtering over a periodic cycle providing an automatic wah effect Parameter Value Mode LPF BPF Polarity Down Up Sens 0 100 Freq 0 100 Peak 0 100 Rate 0 100 BPM
21. Mode OSC Natural Hise Time 0 100 Mode OSC Rise Time A 0 100 Mode OSC F B Level 0 100 F B Level A 0 100 Mode OSC Vib Rate 0 100 BPM BPM A Mode OSC Vib Depth 0 100 Mode OSC Mode Select either oscillator OSC or natural Natural OSC Oscillator An artificial feedback sound will be created internally When OSC is selected the effect is activated after a single note is played and the note stabilizes A feedback effect is created when the effect switches on the feedback disappears when the OSC effect switches off Natural Analyzes the pitch of the guitar sound being input and then creates a feedback sound Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Rise Time This determines the time needed for the volume of the feedback sound to reach its maximum from the moment the effect is turned on Rise Time A This determines the time needed for the volume of the one octave higher feedback sound to reach its maximum from the moment the effect is turned on F B Level Feedback Level Adjusts the volume of the feedback sound F B Level A This adjusts the volume of the one octave higher feedback sound Vib Rate Vibrato Rate This adjusts the rate of the vibrato when the feedbacker is on When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect soun
22. SG TR 00 00 00 02 00 64 DF Effect Level RM 00 00 00 02 00 71 FB Vibrato Rate Refer to Table Rate 00 OE PW 00 00 00 02 00 64 AW Depth TM ACS LM ENH SG TR 00 00 00 02 00 64 DF Direct Level RM 00 00 00 02 00 64 FB Vibrato Depth 00 10 PW 00 00 00 02 00 64 AW Level TM ACS LM ENH TR SG DF RM FB 104 Appendices COMP 01 00 00 00 00 02 00 64 CS Sustain 01 02 00 00 00 02 00 64 CS Level OD DS 02 00 00 00 00 02 00 18 OD Type Refer to Table OD Type 02 02 00 00 00 02 00 64 OD Drive 02 04 00 00 00 02 00 64 OD Bass 02 06 00 00 00 02 00 64 OD Treble 02 08 00 00 00 02 00 64 OD EffectLevel 02 OA 00 00 00 02 00 64 OD DirectLevel PREAMP SP SIM 03 00 00 00 00 02 00 2F PRE SP Type Refer to Table PRE SP Type 03 02 00 00 00 02 00 78 PRE SP Gain 03 04 00 00 00 02 00 64 PRE SP Bass 03 06 00 00 00 02 00 64 PRE SP Middle 03 08 00 00 00 02 00 64 PRE SP Treble 03 0A 00 00 00 02 00 64 PRE SP Presence 03 OC 00 00 00 02 00 64 PRE SP Amp Level 03 1E 00 00 00 02 00 01 PRE SP Bright 03 10 00 00 00 02 00 02 PRE SP Gain Switch 03 12 00 00 00 02 00 09 PRE SP Speaker Type Refer to Table Patch 03 14 00 00 00 02 00 04 PRE SP Mic Type Refer
23. Set OUTPUT SELECT as shown below when the PREAMP SPEAKER type p 29 is set to CONCERT 610 SESSION BASS 360 T E B MAN FLIP TOP Bass Clean Bass 2 Crunch Bass HiGain or Mic Preamp When connecting to an audio amp or similar equipment MS P Line Phones MP SPEAKER PATCF ALUE AUXINPUT OUTPUT BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL Y d D d e ed zm When connecting to a guitar amp CHORUS REVERB CJ CJ a CJ f ro ry un i el SYSTEM Combo Amp OF Combo Return cJ CJ rue leeden m When connecting to a bass amp z e C EWEN Stack Amp or Stack Return 5 10 GUITAR EFFECTS STEM with USB AUDIO IN ERFACE sz PHONES GUITAR BASS w Guitar Tuning 1 You can use the GS 10 s built in tuner function to tune your guitar For instructions on using this function refer to Tuning 1 Press SYSTEM causing the indicator to light the Guitar p 64 The Output Select settings screen appears 2 Turn the PATCH VALUE dial to select the type of device connected to the OUTPUT jack or GUITAR AMP OUT jack Line Phones Set this when connecting the OUTPUT jack to an audio set or when connecting a recorder for recording Use this setting also when using the GS 10 s speakers or headphones Combo AMP Use this setting when connecting to the guitar input of a combo amp where the amp and speaker or speakers are combined in a single unit Stack AMP Use this setting when
24. This is set to Omni On when shipped from the factory TX Channel Transmit Channel Valid Settings 1 16 Rx This sets the MIDI Transmit channel used for transmitting MIDI messages When set to Rx this MIDI channel is same as the MIDI Receive channel This is set to Rx when shipped from the factory Device ID Valid Settings 1 32 This sets the Device ID used for transmitting and receiving Exclusive messages This is set to 17 when shipped from the factory Sync Clock Valid Settings Auto Internal You can synchronize the performance of a sequencer or other external MIDI device Auto When the MIDI Clock of the external MIDI device is not being received the performance is synchronized to the tempo set in MASTER BPM when the external MIDI device s MIDI Clock is being received the performance is synchronized to that Internal The performance is synchronized to the tempo set in Master BPM This is set to Auto when shipped from the factory When you have an external MIDI device connected the Master BPM is then synchronized to the external MIDI device s tempo thus disabling the Master BPM setting To enable setting of the Master BPM set to Internal When synchronizing performances to the MIDI Clock signal from an external MIDI device timing problems in the performance may occur due to errors in the MIDI Clock 69 un o A e Q 00 C
25. and select Update all information from the Commands menu In the USB area three audio devices will be displayed If these are displayed correctly driver installation has succeeded Apple System In the File menu click Quit to close Apple System Profiler If they are not displayed correctly disconnect the GS 10 wait for about ten seconds and then repeat the procedure from step 2 you Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to other devices MEM This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally 157 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh Settings the sound input output l From the Apple menu select Control Panel Sound The Sound dialog box will appear E File Edit view window Special Help About This Computer N AirPort ZO Apple System Profiler E Calculator GG Chooser Control Panels Appearance fi Favorites gt Apple Menu Options Key Caps AppleTalk Network Browser ColorSync ij Recent Applications H Control atte Date amp Time fl Recent Documents gt pialassist Ei Recent Servers H Energy
26. 00 9F 167 01 00 168 01 52 250 00 Off 01 On 0 100 0 100 0 100 00 Guitar 01 Bass 02 Microphone 03 USB Gtr Mic 04 USB Bass 05 AUX Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table Refer to Table 00 Off 01 On Refer to Table Low Cut High Cut Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Chain Name Name Name Target Target Param Min Data Target Param Max Target Param Min Data Target Param Max Refer to Table 00 Normal 01 Toggle 0 127 0 127 Source 113 E Oo D 5 2 le L Appendices ASSIGN 2 OF 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 2 0n Off 00 Off 01 On xx OF 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 ASSIGN 2 Target Refer to Table Target OF 027 01 7F OF 03 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 2 Target Min Target Param Min Data Target Param Max xx OF 04 XX XX OF 05 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 2 Target Max Target Param Min Data Target Param Max OF 067 XX XX OF 07 00 00 00 01 00 41 ASSIGN 2 Source Refer to Table Source xx OF 08 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 2 Source Mode 00 Normal 01 Toggle OF 09 0
27. 03 00 15 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 Db 03 00 15 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 D 03 00 15 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 Eb 03 00 15 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 E 03 00 15 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 F 03 00 15 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 F 03 00 15 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 G 03 00 15 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 Ab 03 00 15 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 A 03 00 15 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 Bb 03 00 15 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 B Scale 23 03 00 16 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 16 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 Db 03 00 16 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 D 03 00 16 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 Eb 03 00 16 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 E 03 00 16 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 F 03 00 16 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 F 03 00 16 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 G 03 00 16 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 Ab 03 00 16 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 A 03 00 16 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 Bb 03 00 16 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 23 B Scale 24 03 00 17 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 24 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 17 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 24 Db 03 00 17 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 24 D 03 00 17 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 24 Eb 03 00 17 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 24 E 03 00 17 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 24 F 03 00 17 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 24 F 03 00 17 07 00 00 00 01 00
28. 08 Patch Level Inc2 09 Patch Level Decl 0A Patch Level Dec2 93 E Oo D 5 2 le rn Appendices Table MIDI SYSTEM MIDI gt Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 01 04 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 OF MIDI Rx Channel 00 1 OF 16 01 04 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 01 MIDI Omni Mode 00 Omni Off 01 Omni On 01 04 00 02 00 00 00 01 00 10 MIDI Tx Channel 00 1 OF 16 10 Rx 01 04 00 03 00 00 00 01 00 1F MIDI Device ID 1 32 01 04 00 04 00 00 00 01 00 01 MIDI Sync Clock 00 Auto 01 Internal 01 04 00 05 00 00 00 01 00 02 MIDI Remote Control 00 Standard 01 Advanced 02 MMC 01 04 00 06 00 00 00 01 00 01 MIDI Knob Control Out 00 Off 01 On 01 04 00 07 00 00 00 01 00 01 MIDI PC Out 00 Off 01 On 01 04 00 08 00 00 00 01 00 5E MIDI EXP Out 00 Off 01 1 1F 31 20 33 5E 95 01 04 00 09 00 00 00 01 00 5E MIDI CTL1 Out 00 Off 01 1 1F 31 20 33 5E 95 01 04 00 0A 00 00 00 01 00 5E MIDI CTL2 Out 00 Off 01 1 IE 31 20 33 5E 95 01 04 00 OB 00 00 00 01 00 01 MIDI Map Select 00 Fix 01 Program MIDI Program Map 01 04 10 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 MIDI Program Map MIDI Map Select Program 01 04 10 01 01 47 B 0 P 1 00 00 U001 User 00 63 U100 User 00 64 P101 Preset 00 7F P128 Preset 01 00 P129 Preset 01 47 P200 Preset 01 04 10 02 00 00 00 02 00 00 MIDI Program Map 01 04 10 03 01 47 B 0 P 2 01 04 11 7E 00 00 00 02 00 00 MIDI Pro
29. 1 4 inches Phone Plug mono x 2 0 dBu 0 775 Vrms 124 vou In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice AF Method Adaptive Focus method This is a proprietary method from Roland that vastly improves the signal to noise S N ratio of the A D and D A converters Installing amp Setup the USB Driver In order to use the GS 10 USB you must first install the USB driver The USB Driver is included in the GS 10 SOFTWARE CD ROM B What is USB Driver The USB Driver is software which passes data between the GS 10 and the application sequencer software etc that is running on the USB connected computer The GS 10 Driver sends data from the application to the GS 10 and passes data from the GS 10 to the application The GS 10 can receive and transmit both digital audio signals and MIDI messages Application USB connector USB Go Driver 55 USB cable GC 2 Computer GS 10 The explanation about installing and setup the driver is organized according to the computer and driver mode that you are using Please proceed to the following pages Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows p 126 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh p 146 125 Installing amp
30. 148 or FreeMIDI settings p 151 check the OMS or FreeMIDI settings Also make sure that the device for MIDI IN OUT is correctly selected in the MIDI settings of your MIDI sequencer software Macintosh _1 Is the OMS setup enabled fa diamond shaped symbol is not displayed at the left edge of the title area in the OMS setup window the setup is not enabled From the OMS File menu choose Make Current OMS settings p 148 Troubleshooting Interrupted notes or delays occur during MIDI playback Noise is heard during audio playback Windows Windows Macintosh ised LJ Make Windows XP settings to enable background SEHR KE EE kioptai edi processing Ifyou are not using any audio devices connected to the Make the following settings so that MIDI processing will aun INPUT ii the AUX INPUT LEVEL knob to minimum position occur smoothly 1 Click the Windows start button and from the menu J Isa micor guitar still connected that appears select Control Panel fa mic or guitar is connected to the GS 10 disconnect 2 In Pick a category click Performance and the GE or guitar Disconnect any audio devices you are not using Maintenance In or pick a Control Panel icon click the System icon _1 Noise is sometimes heard in the line input or mic input Click the Advanced tab Ifa USB compatible MIDI sound module and the GS 10 Atthe right of the Performance field click
31. 1A Pitch D 1B Pitch Eb 1C Pitch E 1D Pitch F lE Pitch F 1F Pitch G 20 Pitch Ab 21 Pitch A 22 Pitch Bb 23 Pitch B 24 Pitch c 25 Pitch Db 26 Pitch D 27 Pitch Eb 28 Pitch E 29 Pitch F 2A Pitch F f 2B Pitch G 1 2C Pitch Ab 2D Pitch LA 2E Pitch Bb 2F Pitch LB 30 Pitch c ff 31 Pitch 32 Pitch end gt Oo D 5 2 le rn 101 Appendices Table AMP AMP Customize Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 03 02 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 06 Customl Type 00 JC Clean 01 TW Clean 02 Crunch 03 VO Lead 04 BG Lead 05 MS1959 Stk 06 Modern Stk 03 02 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 0A Customl Bottom 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 0A 50 03 02 00 02 00 00 00 01 00 0A Customl Edge 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 0A 50 03 02 00 03 00 00 00 01 00 0A Customl Bass Frequency 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 0A 50 03 02 00 04 00 00 00 01 00 0A Customl Treble Frequency 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 0A 50 03 02 00 05 00 00 00 01 00 0A Customl Preamp Low 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 OA 50 03 02 00 06 00 00 00 01 00 0A Customl Preamp High 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 0A 50 03 02 01 00 00 00 00 01 00 06 Custom2 Type 03 02 01 01 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Bottom 03 02 01 02 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Edge 03 02 01 03 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Bass Freque
32. 61 Chapter 6 Setting the External Pedal Functions Although you can set this so that the same target is controlled by more than one controller in such cases make sure not to have different sources changing the parameter at the same time Changing the parameter simultaneously using different sources may result in noise being generated Target Range The value of the parameter selected as the target changes within the range defined by Min and Max as set on the GS 10 When using an external foot switch or other controller that acts as an on off switch Min is selected with Off CLOSED and Max is selected with On OPEN When using an external expression pedal or other controller that generates a consecutive change in the value the value of the setting changes accordingly within the range set by the minimum and maximum values Also when the target is of an on off type the median value of the received data is used as the dividing line in determining whether to switch it on or off When using the foot switch Amount of change in parameter value maximum value Target Max minimum value Target Min Of _ On Release Depress Foot Switch When using the expression pedal maximum value Target Max minimum value Target Min When the pedal When the pedal is fully raised is fully advanced Expression Pedal When controlling the On Off target with the expression pedal
33. Administrators group For more information regarding this consult your computer system administrator 3 Double click Uninstal exe 4 The display will indicate This program uninstalls the BOSS GS 10 USB Driver installed and click the OK button 9 The display will indicate Uninstallation completed and click the Yes button Windows will restart Windows Me 98 users 1 Start Windows with all USB cables disconnected except the keyboard and mouse xd Exit all applications before performing the uninstallation SS Double click Uninstal exe gt The display will indicate This program uninstalls the BOSS GS 10 USB Driver installed and click the OK button 5 The display will indicate Uninstallation completed and click the Yes button Windows will restart Macintosh users 1 Disconnect the USB cable by which the GS 10 is connected from your Macintosh 2 From the system extensions folder drag USB GS 10 Driver into the trash to delete it 3 Delete GS 10 from the OMS Folder inside the System folder or drag GS 10 Driver from the FreeMIDI Folder to the trash 4 Drag the ASIO driver that you installed in Installing the ASIO driver p 154 into the trash to delete it 5 Restart the Macintosh 173 Numerics Role 45 A E Ee 12 CCNL 12 CV ANC OO cai 70 Advanced Compressor EE 38 tee EE 11 60 61 PASSION e M 60 66 ACUVe O
34. CMD Command ID BODY Main data F7H End of exclusive MIDI status FOH F7H An Exclusive message must be flanked by a pair of status codes starting with a Manufacturer ID immediately after FOH MIDI version 1 0 eManufacturer ID 41H The Manufacturer ID identifies the manufacturer of a MIDI instrument that sends an Exclusive message Value 41H represents Roland s Manufacturer ID eDevice ID DEV The Device ID contains a unique value that identifies individual devices in the implementation of several MIDI instruments It is usually set to 00H 0FH a value smaller by one than that of a basic channel but value 00H 1FH may be used for a device with several basic channels eModel ID MDL The Model ID contains a value that identifies one model from another Different models however may share an identical Model ID if they handle similar data The Model ID format may contain 00H in one or more places to provide an extended data field The following are examples of valid Model IDs each representing a unique model 01H 02H 03H 00H 01H 00H 02H 00H 00H 01H eCommand ID CMD The Command ID indicates the function of an Exclusive message The Command ID format may contain 00H in one or more places to provide an extended data field The following are examples of valid Command IDs each representing a unique function 01H 02H 03H 00H 01H 00H 02H 00H 00H 01H eMain data BODY This field contains
35. D 5 2 le L Appendices 05 2B 00 00 00 01 00 64 PS PS2 Level 0 100 KE ORE Db C 00 00 00 01 00 64 PS Direct Level 0 100 05 2D 00 00 00 01 00 03 OC Range Refer to Table OC Range 05 2E 00 00 00 01 00 64 OC Octave Level 0 100 05 2F 00 00 00 01 00 64 OC Direct Level 0 100 xx x 05 30 00 00 00 01 00 30 PB Pitch Min 24 24 05 31 00 00 00 01 00 30 PB Pitch Max 24 24 05 32 00 00 00 01 00 64 PB Pdl Position 0 100 05 33 00 00 00 01 00 64 PB Effect Level 0 100 05 34 00 00 00 01 00 64 PB Direct Level 0 100 05 35 00 00 00 01 00 10 2CE Xover Frequency Refer to Table Xover Frequency 05 36 00 00 00 01 00 71 2CE Low Rate Refer to Table Rate 05 37 00 00 00 01 00 64 2CE Low Depth 0 100 05 38 00 00 00 01 00 50 2CE Low Pre Delay 0 0ms 40 0ms 0 5ms step 05 39 00 00 00 01 00 64 2CE Low Level 0 100 05 3A 00 00 00 01 00 71 2CE High Rate Refer to Table Rate 05 3B 00 00 00 01 00 64 2CE High Depth 0 100 05 3C 00 00 00 01 00 50 2CE High Pre Delay 0 0ms 40 0ms 0 5ms step 05 3D 00 00 00 01 00 64 2CE High Level 0 100 05 3E 00 00 00 01 00 64 PAN Wave Shape 0 100 05 3F 00 00 00 01 00 71 PAN Rate Refer to Table Rate 05 40 00 00 00 01 00 64 PAN Depth 0 100 05 41 00 00 00 01 00 71 VB Rate Refer to Table Rate 05 42 00
36. I PS2 Level Velocity Uu Jg Jg I I I SYN Hold BS SEQ Refer to Table Pre Delay Refer to Table Patch Refer to Table Patch Appendices 107 E Oo D 5 2 le L Appendices 00 00 00 02 Kk kxk 05 22 00 00 00 02 DELAY xx xx 06 00 00 00 00 02 06 02 00 00 00 02 06 04 00 00 00 02 FECE 06 06 00 00 00 02 xx xx 06 08 00 00 00 02 06 0A 00 00 00 02 xx xx 06 0C 00 00 00 02 CHORUS xx ek 07 00 00 00 00 02 xx xx 07 02 00 00 00 02 07 04 00 00 00 02 xx xx 07 06 00 00 00 02 xx xx 07 08 00 00 00 02 XX xx 07 0A 00 00 00 02 xx wo 07 OC 00 00 00 02 REVERB xx xx 08 00 00 00 00 02 x 08 02 00 00 00 02 xx xx 08 04 00 00 00 02 xx xx 08 06 00 00 00 02 EROS 08 08 00 00 00 02 08 0A 00 00 00 02 xx xx 08 0C 00 00 00 02 ASSIGN ww xx 09 00 00 00 00 04 09 02 xx xx 09 04 00 00 00 04 09 06 ww ww 09 08 00 00 00 04 Kk kk 09 0A E xx 09 0C 00 00 00 02 xx 09 OF 00 00 00 02 xx xx 09 10 00 00 00 02 xx ER 09 12 00 00 00 02 SYN Synth Level BS SEQ SYN Direct Level BS SEQ DD DD DD DD DD DD DD Type DlyTime DlyTime Fine Tap Time Feedback High Cut Filter Effect Level CE CE CE CE CE CE CE Mode Rate Depth Pre Delay Low Cut Filter High Cut Filter Effect Level RV RV RV RV RV RV RV Type Reverb Time Pre Delay Low Cut Filter Hi
37. On Target Max On Off Target Min Off When the pedal When the pedal When the pedal is fully raised is advanced halfway is fully advanced Expression Pedal The range that can be selected changes according to the target setting When the minimum is set to a higher value than the maximum the change in the parameter is reversed The values of settings can change if the target is changed after the minimum and maximum settings have been made If you ve changed the target be sure to recheck the minimum and maximum settings Chapter 6 Setting the External Pedal Functions Source Active Range This sets the controller source that affects the target hn d ak parameter Peire hoa PME ET FE dang Controllers that can be selected as the source are shown below This sets the operational range within which the value of the setting changes when an expression pedal or other controller EXP PEDAL that changes the value consecutively is used as the source If Expression pedal connected to the EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 the controller is moved outside the operational range the jack value does not change it stops at minimum or maximum CTL 1 CTL 2 Foot switch connected to the EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 jack Example With Act Range Lo 40 Act Range Hi 80 MIDI CC 1 31 64 95 Control Change messages from an external MIDI device 1 maximum value 31 64 95 Target Max Source Mode Pim AL
38. RM Frequency RM Effect Level RM Direct Level FB Mode FB Rise Time FB Rise Time A FB F B Level FB F B Level A FB Vibrato Rate FB Vibrato Depth CS On Off CS Sustain CS Level OD On Off OD Type OD Drive OD Bass OD Treble OD Effect Level OD Direct Level PRE SP 0On Off PRE SP Channel Select PRE SP Type PRE SP Gain PRE SP Bass PRE SP Middle PRE SP Treble PRE SP Presence PRE SP Amp Level PRE SP Bright PRE SP Gain SW PRE SP Speaker Type PRE SP Mic Type PRE SP Mic Distance PRE SP Mic Position PRE SP Mic Level PRE SP Direct Level PRE SP Type PRE SP Gain PRE SP Bass PRE SP Middle PRE SP Treble PRE SP Presence PRE SP Amp Level 01 Rack 160D 02 Vtg Rack U 0 100 0 100 Refer to Table Ratio 0 100 0 100 Refer to Table ENH Frequency 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 Refer to Table Rate 0 100 50 50 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 00 Normal 01 Intelligent 0 100 0 100 0 100 00 OSC 01 Natural 0 100 Mode OSC 0 100 Mode OSC 0 100 0 100 Mode OSC 0 100 Mode OSC Refer to 0 100 Mode OSC Table Rate 00 Off 01 On 0 100 0 100 00 Off 01 On Refer to Table OD Type 0 100 50 50 50 50 0 100 0 100 00 Off 01 On A B C Ach Refer to Table PRE SP Type Ach 0 120 Ach 0 100 Ach 0 100 Ach 0 100 Ach 0 100
39. Remote Control If you have a MIDI controllable recorder sequencer or other such external MIDI device connected to the GS 10 you can connect a foot switch to the EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 jack and use it for remote control of the external MIDI device Setting the Messages Used for Controlling Devices The GS 10 features three kinds of messages MIDI messages that are used for controlling external MIDI devices and you can select messages in accordance with the connected device AUX INPUT OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL PREAMP SPEAKER PATCH VALUE BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL 20900 O i PARAMETER gt hen AKER CHORUS REVERB a LEVEL LEVEL MP CECE EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM CJ O CJ AP e TUNER 1 us add Ed 4 NAME NS CJ LE CO 5 T 5 10 GUITAR EFFECTS STEM mn AU with USB AUDIO IN ERFACE CJ CJ Card PHONES GUITAR BASS w 3 1 1 Press SYSTEM a number of times then press PARAMETER B so that MIDI Remote Ctrl is displayed 2 Usethe PATCH VALUE dial to select the message according to the connected external MIDI device When set to Standard MIDI System messages are transmitted When set to Advanced Some computer applications allow recording and playback functions such as Start and Stop to be assigned to specified MIDI messages When this setting is selected Note messages used in sending commands for remote control to the application and Note messages
40. Settings are connected via USB to the same computer and the The Performance Options dialog box will appear outputs of the MIDI sound module are connected to the line input jacks of the GS 10 noise from your computer Click the A tab Bx EOS EE may be heard via the MIDI sound module from the GS Performance Options 10 depending on the computer you are using If this e ls OCCUrs you can either connect the MIDI sound module and the GS 10 in parallel using a self powered hub or connect the MIDI sound module via its serial or MIDI mons interface Ores Gemeen LJ Are two or more audio devices such as the GS 10 or a ne SE EE mixer connected to your computer TTT E Try connecting only a single GS 10 unit and check whether the noise disappears If numerous audio devices are connected to a computer noise may occur depending 7 Inthe Processor Scheduling field select Background EE EE services and click OK OPES BER 8 Inthe System Properties dialog box click OK M The System Properties dialog box will close IH Does your sequencer software support ASIO 2 0 f your ASIO compatible software does not support ASIO 2 0 it will not operate correctly if you use GS 10 ASIO2 0 16bit or GS 10 ASIO2 0 24bit as the ASIO driver In this case select either GS 10 ASIO1 0 16bit or GS 10 ASIO1 0 24bit as the ASIO driver Macintosh IH Does your sequencer software support 24 bit audio If your ASIO compatible software
41. The Key G 1 will be connected to the Function 4 Make the following settings in the Key Bindings area Transport Record dialog box Repeat Steps 5 16 so that the following settings are Type of Keys created Check MIDI and Enable Note Key Function MIDI Shift Options Reset 05 F 1 Transport Reset Check Key and input C 1 Stop 02 D 1 Transport Stop 5 he Bindi 5 Play 04 E Transport Play In the Bindings area set Key to D 1 Re Gi Tia Do Record 6 Inthe Function area select Transport Stop 17 Click the OK button to finish making settings 7 Click the Bind button The Key D 1 will be connected to the Function area Transport Stop The Key Bindings dialog box will close and the settings will be completed 8 In the Bindings area set Key to E 1 9 Inthe Function area select Transport Play 10 Click the Bind button The Key E 1 will be connected to the Function area Transport Play 11 In the Bindings area set Key to F 1 12 In the Function area select Transport Reset 13 Click the Bind button The Key F 1 will be connected to the Function area Transport Reset un o A e Q E 00 77 Chapter 9 Using the GS 10 Connected to a Computer Via USB Before Connecting with USB Setting USB Related Functions With the GS 10 you can use USB to tran
42. US RC Im ADAPT IR ONLY 20950055 QC O det ape X O Oz A sf ENCE e Hats EULA deeg ce Fe with omen EH n BOSS Corporation LES E GENCES DU REGLEMENT SUR LE IATERIEL BROUILLEUR DU CANADA wen FOR HOME IR OFFICE USE 1 MIC INPUT Jack Connector Input jack connector for use with mics Both standard 12 Security Slot TRS type and XLR type are provided http www kensington com Use only one of these jacks at a time Not compatible with phantom power 2 AUX INPUT Jacks L R Used for connecting a CD player or similar audio device rhythm machine sound module or similar devices 3 OUTPUT Jacks L R Used for connecting to an audio set recorder mixer or similar equipment 4 GUITAR AMP OUT Jack Connect your guitar amp here 5 EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 Expression Pedal Control Pedal 1 2 Jack Connect an optional expression pedal such as the EV 5 or foot switch such as the FS 5U here 6 DIGITAL OUT Connector Outputs digital audio signals 7 USB Connector Use a USB cable to connect this connector to your computer to exchange data between the GS 10 and the computer 8 MIDI IN OUT Connector Connect an external MIDI device to these connectors to transmit and receive MIDI messages 9 POWER switch Turns the power on and off 10 AC Adaptor Jack Connect the included AC adaptor BRC series here 11 Cord Hook Hook the AC adaptor cord here to prevent the adaptor
43. When Brass or Bow is selected for the wave the attack time will not be quicker from a certain level even if the attack is set to Decay or 0 Release This determines the time needed for the synthesizer sound to reach zero from the moment the input of the guitar sound is completed When Brass or Bow is selected for the wave the guitar signal itself is processed That is the synthesizer sound will go down when the guitar signal goes down no matter how long the release may be set 51 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Velocity This adjusts the amount of the volume change of the synthesizer sound When it is set to high the volume change will be greater depending on the picking strength When it is set to 0 no volume change is caused even by changing the picking manner Hold The hold function can sustain the output of the synthesizer sound If you turn on the hold while a synthesizer sound is being output the synthesizer sound will be held until you turn it off tis assumed that this parameter will be assigned p 60 to the foot switch This parameter is used when Square or Saw is selected for the wave Synth Level Adjusts the volume of the synthesizer sound Direct Level Adjusts the volume of the direct sound BS Bass Simulator Simulates the sound of a bass guitar Obtain the sound of a bass guitar while playing an electric guitar You shou
44. number increases by 1 each time the foot switch is pressed When connecting two foot switches using the special optional Direct Patch Down Roland PCS 31 connector cord the foot switch connected with The direct patch p 18 number decreases by 1 each time the white banded plug functions according to the Control 1 the foot switch is pressed function settings and the foot switch connected with the red banded plug functions according to the Control 2 function settings Patch Up The patch p 18 number increases by 1 each time the foot switch is pressed When you have only one foot switch connected the Control 1 function settings are used Patch Down The patch p 18 number decreases by 1 each time the 2 1 foot switch is pressed Patch Level Incl The patch level p 54 value increases by 10 each time PATCE ALUE AUX INPUT OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL MP SPEAKER S miu 9 the foot switch is pressed C CJ EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM Pa tc h Leve I l n C 2 CJ C CJ ce VESPE The patch level p 54 value increases by 20 each time za JE CO CEE the foot switch is pressed CJ GUITAR EFFECTS STEM s m rx2 assien Au C 5 10 with USB AUDIO IN ERFACE o Ez zm Dal Patch Level Dec1 r ali care The patch level p 54 value decreases by 10 each time the foot switch is pressed 3 1 Patch Level Dec2 The patch level p 54 value decreases by 20 each time 1 Press SYSTEM then press PARA
45. such as a piano that provides the pitch to which the other instruments refer in tuning before a performance begins is called the reference pitch You can set the reference pitch on the GS 10 from 435 to 445 Hz This is set to 440 Hz when shipped from the factory Setting the Output Used During Tuning This selects the output while Tuner is on Mute Sounds are muted and no sound is output Chapter 7 Convenient Functions and System Settings Bypass Sounds input to the GS 10 bypass the processing and are output directly as is This is set to Bypass when shipped from the factory RE al cgg LEVEL s Geet MUEVEL icu XIT OO DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 2 3 4 NAME NS CJ C mi IT EQ MASTER CO GS 10 GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM sa Sing HUMANZER cy ASSIGN JT with USB AUDIO INTERFACE fem SN CCELI PEDAL BEND SHORTDELAY STEREO EQ INS DEL CAPS PHONES GUITAR BASS v 5 1 5 1 Press TUNER causing the indicator to light 2 Press PARAMETER lt gt gt luntil you have either Tuner Pitch or Tuner Output displayed 3 Rotate the VALUE dial to change the settings 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to change each parameter s settings 5 Press TUNER or EXIT to return to the Play screen HINT Switching Tuner On and Off with the External Pedal You can use an external pedal such as the FS 5U connected to the EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 jack to switch the tuner on and off
46. 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 64 00 64 00 02 00 66 00 14 00 64 00 64 00 09 00 78 00 02 00 71 00 64 00 50 00 0A 00 09 00 64 00 04 00 63 00 64 00 0A 00 09 00 0A 00 64 00 00 00 00 00 00 OF OF XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX 00 41 00 01 00 7F 00 7F Quick Fx Name Data H 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F 20 7F Name 1 Refer Name 2 Name 12 Name Refer Name Nr Name 12 Name 1 Refer Name 2 Name 12 Name Refer Name Nr Name 12 Name 1 Refer Name 2 Name 12 to Table to Table to Table to Table to Table Name Name Name Name Name FX 2 eus kk kxk 05 00 05 01 kk kk e 05 OBF DELAY eee 06 00 06 01 Kk kxk xx 06 OB CHORUS kk kk 07 00 07 01 Kk kk xx 07 0B REVERB 08 00 xx 08 01 Kk kxk xx 08 OBF aec ASSIGN eec 09 00 09 01 Kk kk xx 09 OBF Table Patch ed PXI sce xx 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 04 00 05 00 06 00 07 00 08 00 09 00 OA 00 OB 00 OC 00 OD 00 OE 00 OF 00 10 00 11
47. 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 OB 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 Db 03 00 OB 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 D 03 00 OB 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 Eb 03 00 0B 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 E 03 00 OB 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 F 03 00 OB 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 F 03 00 0B 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 G 03 00 OB 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 Ab 03 00 OB 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 A 03 00 0B 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 Bb 03 00 0B OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 12 B Scale 13 03 00 OC 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 0C 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 Db 03 00 OC 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 D 03 00 OC 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 Eb 03 00 0C 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 E 03 00 0C 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 F 03 00 OC 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 F 03 00 0C 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 G 03 00 OC 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 Ab 03 00 OC 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 A 03 00 0C 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 Bb 03 00 OC OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 13 B Scale 14 03 00 OD 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 14 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 OD 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 14 Db 03 00 OD 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 14 D 03 00 OD 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 14 Eb 03 00 OD 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 14 E 03 00 OD 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 14 F 03 00 OD 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Sca
48. 00 00 01 00 64 VB Depth 0 100 05 43 00 00 00 01 00 01 VB Trigger 00 Off 01 On 05 44 00 00 00 01 00 64 VB Rise Time 0 100 05 45 00 00 00 01 00 71 UV Rate Refer to Table Rate 05 46 00 00 00 01 00 64 UV Depth 0 100 05 47 00 00 00 01 00 64 UV Level 0 100 05 48 00 00 00 01 00 01 RT Speed Select 00 slow 01 fast 05 49 00 00 00 01 00 71 RT Rate Slow Refer to Table Rate 05 4A 00 00 00 01 00 71 RT Rate Fast Refer to Table Rate 05 4B 00 00 00 01 00 64 RT Rise Time 0 100 05 4C 00 00 00 01 00 64 RT Fall Time 0 100 05 4D 00 00 00 01 00 64 RT Depth 0 100 kk 05 4E 00 00 00 02 00 00 SDD Delay Time Refer to Table SDD Delay Time 05 4F 03 17 05 50 00 00 00 01 00 64 SDD Feedback 0 100 05 51 00 00 00 01 00 78 SDD Effect Level 0 120 05 52 00 00 00 01 00 02 HU Mode 00 Picking 01 Auto 02 Random 05 53 00 00 00 01 00 04 HU Vowel 1 00 a Mode Picking Auto 01 e 02 i 03 o 04 u 05 54 00 00 00 01 00 04 HU Vowel 2 00 a Mode Picking Auto 01 e 02 Oe De 03 o 04 ui 05 55 00 00 00 01 00 64 HU Sensitivity 0 100 Mode Picking 05 56 00 00 00 01 00 71 HU Rate Refer to Table Rate 05 57 00 00 00 01 00 64 HU Depth 0 100 05 58 00 00 00 01 00 64 HU Manual 0 100 Mode Auto 05 59 00 00 00 01 00 64
49. 00 00 06 02 PH Step Rate 00 00 06 03 PH Effect Level 00 00 06 04 PH Direct Level 00 00 06 05 FL Rate 00 00 06 06 FL Depth 00 00 06 07 FL Manual 00 00 06 08 FL Resonance 00 00 06 09 FL Separation 00 00 06 0A FL Low Cut Filter 00 00 06 OB FL Effect Level 00 00 06 OC FL Direct Level 00 00 06 OD HR Voice HR HR1 Harmony HR HR1 Pre Delay HR HR1 Feedback HR HR1 Level HR HR2 Harmony HR HR2 Pre Delay HR HR2 Level HR Key HR Direct Level PS Voice PS PS1 Mode PS PS1 Pitch PS PS1 Fine PS PS1 Pre Delay PS PS1 Feedback PS PS1 Level PS PS2 Mode PS PS2 Pitch PS PS2 Fine PS PS2 Pre Delay PS PS2 Level PS Direct Level OC Range OC Octave Level OC Direct Level PB Pitch Min PB Pitch Max PB Pdl Position PB Effect Level PB Direct Level 2CE Xover Frequency 2CE Low Rate 2CE Low Depth 2CE Low Pre Delay 2CE Low Level 2CE High Rate 2CE High Depth 2CE High Pre Delay 2CE High Level PAN Wave Shape PAN Rate PAN Depth VB Rate VB Depth VB Trigger VB Rise Time UV Rate UV Depth UV Level RT Speed Select RT Rate Slow RT Rate Fast RT Rise Time RT Fall Time RT Depth SDD Delay Time SDD Feedback SDD Effect Level HU Mode HU Vowel 1 HU Vowel 2 HU Sensitivity HU Rate HU Depth HU Manual HU Level SL Pattern SL Rate SL Trigger Sensitivity AR Phrase AR Loop AR Tempo AR Sensitivity AR Key AR Attack AR Hold AR Effect
50. 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Step12 03 01 00 3C 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Stepl13 03 01 00 3D 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Stepl4 03 01 00 3E 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Step15 03 01 00 3F 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Eb Stepl6 03 01 00 40 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Stepl Refer to Table AR Step Note 03 01 00 41 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Step2 03 01 00 42 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Step3 03 01 00 43 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Step4 03 01 00 44 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Step5 03 01 00 45 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Step6 03 01 00 46 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Step7 03 01 00 47 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Step8 03 01 00 48 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Step9 03 01 00 49 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Stepl0 03 01 00 4A 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Stepll 03 01 00 4B 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Step12 03 01 00 4C 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Stepl13 03 01 00 4D 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Stepl4 03 01 00 4E 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Step15 03 01 00 4F 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 E Stepl6 03 01 00 50 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Stepl Refer to Table AR Step Note 03 01 00 51 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step2 03 01 00 52 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step3 03 01 00 53 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step4 03 01 00 54 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step5 03 01 00 55 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step6 03 01 00 56 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step7 03 01 00 57 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step8 03 01 00 58 00 00 00
51. 01 00 32 User 1 F Step9 03 01 00 59 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Stepl0 03 01 00 5A 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Stepll 03 01 00 5B 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step12 03 01 00 5C 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Stepl13 03 01 00 5D 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Stepl4 03 01 00 5E 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step15 03 01 00 5F 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Stepl6 03 01 00 60 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Stepl Refer to Table AR Step Note 03 01 00 61 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step2 03 01 00 62 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step3 03 01 00 63 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step4 03 01 00 64 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step5 gt 03 01 00 65 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step6 03 01 00 66 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step7 O 03 01 00 67 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step8 E 03 01 00 68 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step9 D 03 01 00 69 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Stepl0 03 01 00 6A 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Stepll o 03 01 00 6B 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Stepl2 A 03 01 00 6C 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Step13 p 03 01 00 6D 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 F Stepl4 L 99 Appendices 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 100 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
52. 02 00 01 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 PREAMP SP SIM 03 00 Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk 03 01 kk 03 OC Kk kk 03 OD Kk kk 03 OE Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk 110 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 64 00 64 00 11 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 0B 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 71 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 01 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 01 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 71 00 64 00 01 00 64 00 64 00 01 00 18 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 01 00 02 00 2F 00 78 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 01 00 02 00 OE 00 04 00 01 00 0A 00 64 00 64 00 2F 00 78 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 LM Attack LM Threshold LM Ratio LM Release LM Level ENH Sensitivity 0 100 ENH Frequency ENH Mix Level SG Sensitivity SG Rise Time TR Wave Shape TR Rate TR Depth DF Tone DF Sensitivity DF Attack DF Depth DF Resonance DF Effect Level DF Direct Level RM Mode
53. 03 00 10 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 Db 03 00 10 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 D 03 00 10 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 Eb 03 00 10 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 E 03 00 10 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 F 03 00 10 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 F 03 00 10 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 G 03 00 10 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 Ab 03 00 10 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 A 03 00 10 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 Bb 03 00 10 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 B 96 Appendices Scale 18 03 00 11 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 11 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 Db 03 00 11 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 D 03 00 11 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 Eb 03 00 11 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 E 03 00 11 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 F 03 00 11 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 F 03 00 11 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 G 03 00 11 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 Ab 03 00 11 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 A 03 00 11 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 Bb 03 00 11 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 18 B Scale 19 03 00 12 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 12 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 Db 03 00 12 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 D 03 00 12 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 Eb 03 00 12 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 E 03 00 12 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 F 03 00 12 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 P 03 00 12 07 00 00
54. 30 Scale 24 G 03 00 17 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 24 Ab 03 00 17 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 24 A 03 00 17 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 24 Bb 03 00 17 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 24 B Scale 25 03 00 18 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 18 O01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 Db 03 00 18 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 D 03 00 18 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 Eb 03 00 18 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 E 03 00 18 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 F 03 00 18 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 F 03 00 18 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 G 03 00 18 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 Ab 03 00 18 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 A 03 00 18 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 Bb 03 00 18 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 25 B Scale 26 03 00 19 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 19 O1 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 Db 03 00 19 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 D E 03 00 19 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 Eb O 03 00 19 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 E O 03 00 19 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 F 03 00 19 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 F D 03 00 19 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 G 03 00 19 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 Ab n 03 00 19 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 A A 03 00 19 OA 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 Bb ul 03 00 19 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 26 B L 97 Appendices Scale 27 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 0
55. A A B NO SIGNAL Y OC 00 00 02 00 7F TUNER Cent 00 NO SIGNAL 40 0 gt i O 7f 63 O 0C 00 00 03 00 00 00 02 00 30 METER peak data 00 30 E Y d 0C 00 00 04 xx 00 30 METER data 00 30 Q A OD n 115 Appendices Table Quick Fx Target Quick Fx Assign Target Data H Description 00 00 00 00 FX1 0n Off 00 00 00 01 FX1 FX Select 00 00 00 02 PW Type 00 00 00 03 PW Pdl Position 00 00 00 04 PW Level 00 00 00 05 AW Mode 00 00 00 06 AW Polarity 00 00 00 07 AW Sensitivity 00 00 00 08 AW Frequency 00 00 00 09 AW Peak 00 00 00 OA AW Rate 00 00 00 OB AW Depth 00 00 00 OC AW Level 00 00 00 OD TM Type 00 00 00 OE TM Low 00 00 00 OF TM High 00 00 01 00 TM Level 00 00 01 01 ACS Type 00 00 01 02 ACS Sustain 00 00 01 03 ACS Attack 00 00 01 04 ACS Tone 00 00 01 05 ACS Level 00 00 01 06 LM Type 00 00 01 07 LM Attack 00 00 01 08 LM Threshold 00 00 01 09 LM Ratio 00 00 01 0A LM Release 00 00 01 OB LM Level 00 00 01 OC ENH Sensitivity 00 00 01 OD ENH Frequency 00 00 01 OE ENH Mix Level 00 00 01 OF SG Sensitivity 00 00 02 00 SG Rise Time 00 00 02 01 TR Wave Shape 00 00 02 02 TR Rate 00 00 02 03 TR Depth 00 00 02 04 DF Tone 00 00 02 05 DF Sensitivity 00 00 02 06 DF Attack 00 00 02 07 DF Depth 00 00 02 08 DF Resonance 00 00 02 09 DF Effect Level 00 00 02 0A DF Direct Level 00 00 02 OB RM Mode 00 00 02 0C RM Frequency 00
56. Act Range High 0 127 ASSIGN 7 14 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 7 0n Off 00 Off 01 On xx 14 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 ASSIGN 7 Target Refer to Table Target 14 02 01 7F 14 03 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 7 Target Min Target Param Min Data Target Param Max 14 04 XX XX 14 05 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 7 Target Max Target Param Min Data Target Param Max xx 14 067 XX XX 14 07 00 00 00 01 00 41 ASSIGN 7 Source Refer to Table Source 14 08 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 7 Source Mode 00 Normal 01 Toggle xx 14 09 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 7 Source Act Range Low 0 127 14 0A 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 7 Source Act Range High 0 127 ASSIGN 8 15 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 8 0n Off 00 Off 01 On 15 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 ASSIGN 8 Target Refer to Table Target 15 027 01 7F 15 03 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 8 Target Min Target Param Min Data Target Param Max 15 04 XX XX 15 05 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 8 Target Max Target Param Min Data Target Param Max 15 06 XX XX 15 07 00 00 00 01 00 41 ASSIGN 8 Source Refer to Table Source x ww 15 08 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 8 Source Mode 00 Normal 01 Toggle 15 09 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 8 Source Act Range Low 0 127 15 0A 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 8 Source Act Range High 0 127 114 Appendices Tab
57. Ead 50 BS Bass omnulator 22 25005 ioni 52 DEO Stereo Egualizet ara 02 NAME NS MAS TER 5 5 GI tror td betae te toe te teg 53 Mame Pateh leet testen gn 53 NOISE e et e esae ues na Datus 53 Masten eR M E 54 POOL VOLUP eoo tbe i ups ict nes 54 Ee C DEDE aatis a Lia cid a DATES 54 Chapter 5 Creating Original Effects Types Customize 55 Customizing the COSM Amps eee 55 Customizing the Speakers ss 56 Customizing Overdrive and Distortion 56 Customizing Pedal Wah eee 57 Chapter 6 Setting the External Pedal Functions 58 Setting the External Expression Pedal Functions Expression Pedal Function 58 Setting the External Foot Switch Functions Control 1 2 Function eee eese nette eee 59 Setting the External Pedal Function for Individual Patches Assign 60 Quick Setin E Ringar a 60 Mamuak Settings cine 61 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions and System Settings 64 Tanino the E aan 64 Turning the Tuner Function On 64 About the Display During Tuning ss sssseseseen 64 eler e inopem p ban MD MS 64 Changing the Tuner Settings n 64 Adjusting the Display Contrast LCD Contrasti 65 Limiting the Patches That Can Be Switched Patch Extent 65 Keeping the Same
58. Expression pedal Function or Control 1 or 2 Function setting to Assign 1 8 Setting the External Expression Pedal Functions Expression Pedal Function PREAMP SPEAKER MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL SPEAKER ON OFF CHORUS REVERB C LEVEL LEVEL mpi d m T DIRECT PATO TUNER 1 2 3 4 NAMEZNS C LCE E JC CH C 5 10 GUITAR EFFECTS STEM E ASSIGN JN P with USB AUDIO IN ERFACE SLICER CO C O s95s AZ PHONES GUITAR BASS w 3 1 Press SYSTEM then press PARAMETER B so that EXP PDL Func is displayed Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to set the expression pedal function Auto Normally used as a foot volume pedal When Pedal Wah p 36 or Pedal Bend p 45 is switched on the expression pedal automatically switches to the pedal wah or pedal bend function When Pedal Wah and Pedal Bend are switched off the pedal automatically operates as a foot volume pedal Assign 1 8 Used as the controller set in the Assign p 60 for each patch Foot Volume Used as a foot volume pedal Patch Level Used as a patch level controller Pedal Wah Used as a pedal wah when Pedal Wah is on Pedal Bend Used as a pedal bend when Pedal Bend is on Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Chapter 6 Setting the External Pedal Functions Setting the External Foot Switch Direct Patch Up Functions Control 9 Function The direct patch p 18
59. For Sound playback Sound recording and MIDI music playback click the V located at the right of Default device or in Windows 2000 Me Preferred device and select the following from the list that appears Sounds and Audio Devices Properties Volume Sounds Audio Voice Hardware Sound playback Default device BOSS GS 10 v Sound recording A Default device A poss GS 10 MIDI music playback as Default device a BOSS GS 10 MIDI OUT C Use only default devices Special driver mode Standard driver mode si driver mode Sound GS 10 Ee XP playback Doe USB Audio Device Windows 2000 Me Sound GS 10 Windows XP ee USB Audio Device Windows 2000 Me MIDI cannot be handled when using Standard Driver mode MIDI in Standard Driver Mode p 80 MIDI music playback BOSS GS 10 MIDI OUT 9 Click OK to close the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties dialog box This concludes the procedure for setting the input and output destinations Next set the Windows Volume Control p 144 142 MEM Depending on how your system is set up the Sounds and Audio Devices icon may be displayed directly in the Control Panel the Classic view In this case double click the Sounds and Audio Devices icon MEM If the Sound and Multimedia icon is not displayed click Show all control panel options in the frame at the left Installing amp Setting Up the Drive
60. Fx Number OB 00 06 00 00 00 00 01 00 DELAY Quick Fx Number 0B 00 07 00 00 00 00 01 00 CHORUS Quick Fx Number OB 00 08 00 00 00 00 01 00 REVERB Quick Fx Number 0B 00 09 00 00 00 00 01 00 ASSSIGN1 Quick Fx Number OB 00 0A 00 00 00 00 01 00 ASSSIGN2 Quick Fx Number OB 00 OB 00 00 00 00 01 00 ASSSIGN3 Quick Fx Number OB 00 OC 00 00 00 00 01 00 ASSSIGNA Quick Fx Number OB 00 OD 00 00 00 00 01 00 ASSSIGN5 Quick Fx Number OB 00 OE 00 00 00 00 01 00 ASSSIGN6 Quick Fx Number OB 00 OF 00 00 00 00 01 00 ASSSIGN7 Quick Fx Number OB 00 10 00 00 00 00 01 00 ASSSIGN8 Quick Fx Number Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description QuickSelect 0B 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 FX 1 Quick Fx Count OB 01 01 00 00 00 00 01 00 COMP Quick Fx Count 0B 01 02 00 00 00 00 01 00 OD DS Quick Fx Count OB 01 03 00 00 00 00 01 00 PRE Quick Fx Count OB 01 04 00 00 00 00 01 00 EQ Quick Fx Count OB 01 05 00 00 00 00 01 00 FX 2 Quick Fx Count OB 01 06 00 00 00 00 01 00 DELAY Quick Fx Count 0B 01 07 00 00 00 00 01 00 CHORUS Quick Fx Count OB 01 08 00 00 00 00 01 00 REVERB Quick Fx Count OB 01 09 00 00 00 00 01 00 ASSSIGN Quick Fx Count Table TUNER METER TUNER METER Mode gt TUNER METER Mode 0C 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 Mode 00 exit 01 tuner mode ON 02 meter mode ON 0C 00 00 oi 00 00 00 02 00 DC TUNER Note C C D D E F F G G
61. IN MIDI IN S MIDI OUT Connection at points 1 and 2 is essential Notes on the above procedures There are separate Command IDs for different transfer procedures Devices A and B cannot exchange data unless they use the same transfer procedure share identical Device ID and Model ID and are ready for communication 3 One way Transfer Procedure This procedure sends out data until it has all been sent and is used when the messages are so short that answerbacks need not be checked For longer messages however the receiving device must acquire each message in time with the transfer sequence which inserts 20 milliseconds intervals Types of Messages Request data 1 RQ1 11H Data set 1 DT1 12H Request data 1 RQ1 11H This device does not use this procedure This message is sent out when there is a need to acquire data from a device at the other end of the interface It contains data for the address and size that specify designation and length respectively of data required On receiving an RQ1 message the remote device checks its memory for the data address and size that satisfy the request If it finds them and is ready for communication the device will transmit a Data set 1 DT1 message which contains the requested data Otherwise the device won t send out anything Exclusive Status Manufacturer ID Roland Device ID Model ID Command ID Address MSB Check sum End of exclusive Appendi
62. LM Level ENH Sensitivity ENH Frequency ENH Mix Level SG Sensitivity SG Rise Time TR Wave Shape TR Rate TR Depth DF Tone DF Sensitivity DF Attack DF Depth DF Resonance DF Effect Level DF Direct Level RM Mode RM Frequency RM Effect Level RM Direct Level FB Mode FB Rise Time FB Rise Time A FB F B Level o FB F B Level A FB Vibrato Rate FB Vibrato Dept CS 0n Off CS Sustain CS Level OD 0On Off OD Type OD Drive OD Bass OD Treble OD Effect Level OD Direct Level PRE SP 0n Off PRE SP Channel Select PRE SP Type PRE SP Gain PRE SP Bass PRE SP Middle PRE SP Treble PRE SP Presence PRE SP Amp Level PRE SP Bright PRE SP Gain SW PRE SP Speaker Type PRE SP Mic Type PRE SP Mic Distance PRE SP Mic Position PRE SP Mic Level PRE SP Direct Level EQ 0n Off EO Low EQ EQ Low Middle Frequency EQ Low Middle Q EQ Low Middle EQ EQ High Middle Frequency EQ High Middle Q EQ High Middle EQ EQ High EQ EO Level FX2 0n Off FX2 FX Select PH Type PH Rate PH Depth PH Manual PH Resonance PH Step Rate PH Effect Level PH Direct Level FL Rate FL Depth FL Manual FL Resonance FL Separation FL Low Cut Filter FL Effect Level FL Direct Level HR Voice HR HR1 Harmony HR HR1 Pre Delay HR HR1 Feedback HR HR1 Level HR HR2 Harmony HR HR2 Pre Delay HR HR2 Level HR Key HR Direct Level PS Voice PS PS1 Mode PS
63. Level AR Direct Level SYN Sensitivity SYN Wave SYN Chromatic SYN Octave Shift SYN PWM Rate SYN PWM Depth SYN Cutoff Frequency SYN Resonance SYN FLT Sensitivity SYN FLT Decay SYN FLT Depth SYN Attack SYN Release SYN Velocity SYN Hold SYN Synth Level SYN Direct Level BS Character BS Level SEO Low EOQ SEQ Low Middle Frequency SEO Low Middle Q SEQ Low Middle EQ SEQ High Middle Frequency SEQ High Middle Q SEQ High Middle EQ SEQ High EQ SEQ Level DD On Off DD Type DD DlyTime DD DlyTime F DD Tap Time DD Feedback DD High Cut Filter DD Effect Level CE On Off CE Mode CE Rate CE Depth CE Pre Delay CE Low Cut Filter CE High Cut Filter CE Effect Level RV On Off RV Type RV Reverb Time RV Pre Delay RV Low Cut Filter RV High Cut Filter RV Density RV Effect Level NS On Off NS Threshold NS Release FV Level Patch Level Master BPM TUNER On Off Master BPM Tap Delay Time Tap Remote Start Stop Patch Level Incl Patch Level Inc2 Patch Level Decl Patch Level Dec2 CH Select Inc CH Select Dec Rate whole note doted half note whole note triplet half note doted quarter note half note triplet quarter note doted eighth note quarter note triplet eighth note doted sixteenth note eighth note triplet sixteenth note lt High Cut NHH ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee PREP E p p p pa p i p p p p PPP ka Wi O e DONDWDAD
64. MATCH Fat MATCH P148 MELLOW HOLLOW A Warm Clean Crunch Smooth Drive P149 MELTDOWN A JC 120 Fat MATCH MS1959 T P150 METALIZER A Clean TWIN 5150 Drive Metal Lead Appendices No Patch Name OD DS Ch Select ch A ch B ch C P151 MORPHEOUS C Full Range MATCH Drive R FIER Vint P152 MS TRI CHANNEL A MS1959 I MS1959 1 MS HiGain P153 MODERN CRUNCH A T Amp Clean T Amp Clean T Amp Lead P154 MONO SYNTH A JC 120 Blues SLDN P155 CLEAN amp COMPRESSED A Clean TWIN Clean TWIN BG Lead P156 DRIVE1964 65 69 A VO Drive VO Lead Clean TWIN P157 OCTAVE SYN LEAD Metal Zone A Mic Preamp Mic Preamp Mic Preamp P158 OLD MS w JUMPER A MS1959 1 MS1959 II MS1959 I II P159 SLICE IT UP A BG Rhythm Clean TWIN SLDN P160 OCTAVE T WAH A Clean TWIN BG Lead 5150 Drive P161 RHODES GUITAR A Warm Clean Warm Clean Warm Clean P162 PINK WALL A MATCH Drive MATCH Drive MATCH Drive P163 POWER CHORD Blues OD A Crunch MATCH Drive Fat MATCH P164 ORCHESTRAL DELAY A Clean TWIN Crunch VO Drive P165 ROCK ON DOWN2D Turbo OD A Warm Clean Pro Crunch MS HiGain P166 TRIPLE CLEAN A Warm Clean Pro Crunch T Amp Clean P167 R FIRED UP A R FIER Orng R FIER Orng R FIER Red P168 REAL TWEED A Tweed Tweed Tweed P169 SINGLE gt ACOUSTIC A Mic Preamp Full Range Warm Clean P170 SMOOTH LEAD A Smooth Drive Smooth Drive
65. MD Device B Recognized Remarks MIDI Device A Function Transmit About USB USB short for Universal Serial Bus is an interface for connecting peripheral equipment to computers Using USB you can connect a variety of peripherals using a single USB cable and transfer data rapidly It also allows peripheral devices to be connected or disconnected while the power is left on while the computer automatically recognizes when this occurs some devices may require settings or other procedures With the GS 10 you can use MIDI to transfer MIDI messages and audio data Error Messages If you attempt an incorrect operation or if an operation could not be executed the display will indicate an error message Refer to this list and take the appropriate action The memory backup battery inside the GS 10 has run down This message will appear when the power is turned on O Replace the battery as soon as possible For battery replacement please contact a nearby Roland service center or your dealer There is a problem with the MIDI cable connection O Check to make sure the cable has not been pulled out or is not shorted More MIDI messages were received in a short time than could be processed correctly Q You are attempting to change the following PREAMP SPEAKER p 28 parameter settings with OUTPUT SELECT p 16 set to something other than Line Phones SP Type Mic Type
66. Pedal Operations When Switching Patches Assign Hold 66 Setting the Knob Functions Knob Mode 66 Checking the Effect Output Level with the Level Metet Eed 67 Chapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected 68 Operations Using MIDI eeeeeeeeeeeenen 68 Operating From the GS 10 esee 68 Remotely Controlling the GS 10 Using an External MIDI Device 68 Making the Settings for MIDI Functions 69 Transmitting and Receiving Settings Data 71 Transmitting Data to an External MIDI Device Bulk Dump 71 Receiving Data from an External MIDI Device Bulk Load 72 Setting the Program Change Map 73 Enabling Disabling the Program Change Map Settings MIDI Map Select 74 Changing Patch Numbers on an External MIDI Device From the GS 10 74 Controlling Recorders and Sequencers Remotely from the GS 10 Remote Control 75 Setting the Messages Used for Controlling Devices 75 Controlling the Device Remotely 76 Chapter 9 Using the GS 10 Connected to a Computer Via USB 78 Before Connecting with USB ee 78 Driver ee 78 Setting USB Related Functions 78 Adju
67. Pedal Out Valid Settings Off 1 31 33 95 This sets the controller number when expression pedal operation data is output as Control Change messages When set to Off Control Change messages are not output This is set to CC 7 when shipped from the factory CTL1 Out Control 1 Out Valid Settings Off 1 31 33 95 This sets the controller number when operation data from the external pedal connected to the CTL 1 jack is output as Control Change messages When set to Off Control Change messages are not output This is set to Off when shipped from the factory CTL2 Out Control 2 Out Valid Settings Off 1 31 33 95 This sets the controller number when operation data from the external pedal connected to the CTL 2 jack is output as Control Change messages When set to Off Control Change messages are not output This is set to Off when shipped from the factory 10 ET 70 Chapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected Transmitting and Receiving Settings Data On the GS 10 you can use Exclusive messages to provide another GS 10 with identical settings and save effect settings on a sequencer or other device Transmitting data this way is called Bulk Dump while receiving such data is referred to as Bulk Load Transmitting Data to an External MIDI Device Bulk Dump The following types of data can be transmitted You can transmit data by specifying the range fr
68. SELECT H Eer VIBRATO e Wo e AUTO RIFF zem iro oco DIS E S ROTARY Bass b Pl e SHORT DELAY S PHONES GUITAR BASS w USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About WARNING and Z CAUTION Notices Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe WARNING injury should the unit be used improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it N CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or means that the unit must never be disassembled other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of t
69. SYN FLT Depth 00 100 01 98 63 98 64 100 ke 05 71 00 00 00 01 00 65 SYN Attack 00 Decay 01 0 65 100 05 72 00 00 00 01 00 64 SYN Release 0 100 05 73 00 00 00 01 00 64 SYN Velocity 0 100 05 74 00 00 00 01 00 01 SYN Hold 00 Off Wave Square Saw 01 On 05 75 00 00 00 01 00 64 SYN Synth Level 0 100 05 76 00 00 00 01 00 64 SYN Direct Level 0 100 05 77 00 00 00 01 00 01 BS Character 00 Loose 01 Tight 05 78 00 00 00 01 00 64 BS Level 0 100 05 79 00 00 00 01 00 28 SEQ Low EQ 20dB 20dB 05 7A 00 00 00 01 00 1B SEQ Low Middle Frequency Refer to Table EQ Middle Frequency 05 7B 00 00 00 01 00 05 SEQ Low Middle Q Refer to Table EQ Middle Q 05 7C 00 00 00 01 00 28 SEQ Low Middle EQ 20dB 20dB 05 7D 00 00 00 01 00 1B SEQ High Middle Frequency Refer to Table EQ Middle Frequency 05 7E 00 00 00 01 00 05 SEQ High Middle Q Refer to Table EQ Middle Q 05 7F 00 00 00 01 00 28 SEQ High Middle EQ 20dB 20dB 112 Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Rules for exchanging effect positions 06 00 00 00 06 01 00 00 DELAY 07 00 00 00 07 01 00 00 07 02 00 00 07 03 00 00 07 04 00 00 07 05 00 00 07 06 00 00 07 07 00 0
70. Saver cit Remote Access Status Extensions Manager Scrapbook File Exchange Sherlock 2 File Sharing Speakable Items p Hash it E Stickies General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers OMS Preferred Device QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Update Speech The Sound dialog box will appear 2 Click the Speakers tab or Speaker Settings O Sound B Select the speakers you want to use Use Defaults Tone Aan zl startrest Main Volume d F x Mute 3 With the volume turned down on the GS 10 and on your peripheral audio equipment click Start Test Test signals will be output from the GS 10 left first then right as indicated in the screen 1 Sound E Select the speakers you want to use Use Defaults Tone Stop Test 4 Inthe Sound dialog box click the Input tab 158 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh 9 In Choose a source for sound input Device select USB audio O Sound E Built in Internal CD USB Audio Built in Settings for input device and source L Play sound through output device L Check signal level Level BBJBBBBBBBBBBBBBBE Gain lt Main Volume c I c Cl Mute Do not check Play sound through output device
71. Smooth Drive P171 SNAPPY WAH A Warm Clean Blues T Amp Lead P172 ST CRUNCH AMB A Fat MATCH Crunch VO Drive P173 SUPER CLEAN A Mic Preamp Mic Preamp JC 120 P174 SCOOP A Crunch T Amp Lead 5150 Drive P175 SEMI HOLLOW A Clean TWIN Clean TWIN Clean TWIN P176 SMOOTH SOLO A Smooth Drive Smooth Drive Smooth Drive P177 STRICTLY STRAT Blues OD A Warm Clean Clean TWIN Pro Crunch P178 OCTAVE FUZZ Oct FUZZ A Pro Crunch Clean TWIN Pro Crunch P179 SUPER NATURAL A Warm Clean Mic Preamp JC 120 P180 AUSTIN HOUSTON A Warm Clean Clean TWIN BG Rhythm P181 MOVING IN SYNC A Pro Crunch Tweed BG Drive P182 SWAMP for ST A Pro Crunch Tweed MS1959 I P183 TON O METAL A R FIER Red Drive Stack MS HiGain P184 TREM VIBRATO A Clean TWIN VO Drive Power Stack P185 5th MONO DRONE Oct FUZZ A Warm Clean Clean TWIN MS1959 I II P186 CLN CRUNCH amp TWEED A Clean TWIN Pro Crunch Tweed P187 ROCK RHYTHM A Warm Clean MS1959 I MS1959 I P188 BASSFACE A CONCERT 810 Bass Crunch Bass HiGain P189 PLAY E ACOUSTIC A Mic Preamp Full Range JC 120 P190 PIEZO gt Ac GUITAR C Full Range Full Range Full Range P191 VOCALHARMOIMic A Mic Preamp Clean TWIN MS HiGain P192 FINGERED Bass A FLIP TOP T E BASS 360 P193 PICK DRIVE Bass A SESSION BASS 360 Bass Crunch P194 FUNK SLAP Bass A Bass Clean T E SESSION P195 ENHANCED Bass A SESSION Bass Clean T P196 FRETLESS Bass A BASS 360 Mic Preamp T E P197 TRIPLE 810 Bass A CONCERT 810 CONCERT 8
72. Speed Select Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 04 00 00 SDD Delay Time Refer to Table SDD Delay Time 03 17 00 00 00 02 00 02 HU Mode Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 13 SL Pattern Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 27 AR Phrase Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 64 SYN Sensitivity 00 00 00 02 00 01 BS Character Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 28 GEO Long EQ 05 04 00 00 00 02 00 71 PH Rate Refer to Table Rate 00 00 00 02 00 64 FL Depth 00 00 00 02 00 39 HR HR1 Harmony Refer to Table HR Harmony 00 00 00 02 00 03 PS PS1 Mode Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 64 OC Octave Level 00 00 00 02 00 30 PB Pitch Max 00 00 00 02 00 71 2CE Low Rate Refer to Table Rate 00 00 00 02 00 71 PAN Rate Refer to Table Rate 00 00 00 02 00 64 VB Depth 00 00 00 02 00 64 UV Depth 00 00 00 02 00 71 RT Rate Slow Refer to Table Rate SDD Delay Time LSB 00 00 00 02 00 04 HU Vowel 1 Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 71 SL Rate Refer to Table Rate 00 00 00 02 00 01 AR Loop Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 03 SYN Wave Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 64 BS Level 00 00 00 02 00 1B SEQ Low Middle Frequency Refer to Table EQ Middle Frequency 05 06 00 00 00 02 00 64 PH Depth 00 00 00 02 00 64 FL Manual 00 00 00 04 00 00 HR HR1 Pre Delay Refer to Table Pre Delay 02 33 00 00 00 02 00 30 PS PS1 Pitch 00 00 00 02 00 64 O
73. Standard driver mode Are you attempting to play back an audio CD using your computer s CD player If you want to play an audio CD from your computer s internal CD ROM drive refer to When playing audio CDs from the computer s internal CD ROM drive or using the GS 10 to play game music p 145 Windows LI Are the Volume Control faders raised Adjust the volume of the faders as described in Volume Control setting p 144 168 Can t play back record MIDI Windows LJ Has the MIDI device you are using been set correctly gt In order to record play MIDI tracks using the GS 10 you must correctly install the GS 10 driver Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows p 126 Also make sure that the input port and output port are set as follows in your software INPUT port OUTPUT port BOSS GS 10 MIDI IN BOSS GS 10 MIDI OUT Macintosh LJ Has the MIDI device you are using been selected correctly Select GS 10 MIDI IN OUT as the MIDI output device Windows Macintosh LJ Are the track outputs set correctly MIDI tracks to which no MIDI playback device is assigned will not be heard If you want to play back a MIDI track you must make sure that the MIDI device you want to use is displayed in your software as the MIDI output port For details refer to the owner s manual for your software Macintosh L Is OMS FreeMIDI set correctly As described in OMS settings p
74. USB SPEARE n a3 O Jump EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM CJ DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 4 HANENS C EN N ai EQ MASTER CJ GS GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM INPUT with USB AUDIO INTERFACE FX 2 ASSIGN SELECT Goa INS DEL CAPS PHONES GUITAR BASS w 2 4 1 Select the copy source channel 2 Press WRITE 3 Press CHANNEL SELECT A C to select the copy destination channel The channel copy screen appears in the display fyou press the button for the same channel as the copy source a channel other than the copy source channel is selected for the copy destination Copy source channel Copy destination channel To change the copy source or copy destination channel press PARAMETER lt Be to move the cursor to the copy source or copy destination channel then press CHANNEL SELECT A C You can alternatively rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to change the channel at the cursor position When the copy source channel is changed the tone is changed as well To cancel the copy press EXIT The Play screen returns to the display 4 Press WRITE The settings are copied Tf you want to keep a tone for which you have made settings use the Write procedure p 25 to save it to a User patch 27 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters In this chapter you will find detailed descriptions for each of the GS 10 s onboard effects and the parameters used to control them ven The so
75. a message to be exchanged across an interface The exact data size and content will vary with the Model ID and Command ID 2 Address mapped Data Transfer Address mapping is a technique for transferring messages conforming to the data format given in Section 1 It assigns a series of memory resident records waveform and tone data switch status and parameters for example to specific locations in a machine dependent address space thereby allowing access to data residing at the address a message specifies Address mapped data transfer is therefore independent of models and data categories This technique allows use of two different transfer procedures one way transfer and handshake transfer One way transfer procedure See Section 3 for details This procedure is suited to the transfer of a small amount of data It sends out an Exclusive message completely independent of the receiving device s status Connection Diagram Device B MIDI OUT i MIDI IN MIDI IN terere MIDI OUT Connection at point 2 is essential for Request data procedures See Section 3 Device A eHandshake transfer procedure This device does not use this procedure This procedure initiates a predetermined transfer sequence handshaking across the interface before data transfer takes place Handshaking ensures that reliability and transfer speed are high enough to handle a large amount of data Connection Diagram Device A Device B MIDI OUT MIDI
76. a rotary speaker Parameter Value Speed Sel Slow Fast Rate Slow 0 100 BPM BPM A Rate Fast 0 100 BPM BPM A Rise Time 0 100 Fall Time 0 100 Depth 0 100 Speed Sel Speed Select This parameter changes the simulated speaker s rotating speed Slow or Fast Rate Slow This parameter adjusts the speed of rotation when set to Slow Rate Fast This parameter adjusts the speed of rotation when set to Fast When the Rate Slow or Rate Fast set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Rise Time This parameter adjusts the time it takes for the rotation speed to change when switched from Slow to Fast Fall Time This parameter adjusts the time it takes for the rotation speed to change when switched from Fast to Slow Depth This parameter adjusts the amount of depth in the rotary effect 47 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters SDD Short Delay This is a delay with the maximum delay time of 400 ms This effect is useful for making the sound fatter Parameter Value DlyTime 0 ms 400 ms BPM A BPM Feedbac
77. and then turn on the power ofthe GS 10 2 The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box will appear so select Install from a list or specific location and then click the Next button 3 Select Dont search will choose the driver to install and then click the Next button 4 Make sure that Roland GS 10 is selected in the Models field and click the Next button 5 Ifthe Insert Disk dialog box appears atthis time click the OK button B The Files Needed dialog box will appear so inputthe name of the folder containing the driver DADRIVERYUSB XP2k into the Copy files from area and perform the installation 7 After inputting the folder name click the OK button in the dialog box The setup program will finish 10 Before connecting the USB cable switch the GS 10 s driver mode to Advanced For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 11 With the power switch turned OFF use the USB cable to connect the GS 10 to your computer 12 Make sure that the GS 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL is set to the lowest setting then switch ON the POWER switch The Found New Hardware Wizard will appear Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for BOSS GS 10 d If your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do O Instal
78. as an application that uses the computer s CD ROM drive to play back CD audio or an application that uses the software synthesizer included with Windows Installing the OS standard driver p 136 f you want to use MIDI use special driver mode The standard driver included with Windows does not support ASIO 126 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows Installing the special driver The installation procedure will differ depending on your system Please proceed to one of the following sections depending on the system you use e Windows XP 2000 users p 127 e Windows Me 98 users p 135 B Windows XP 2000 users A Windows XP If you are using Windows XP Professional you must log on l With the GS 10 disconnected start up Windows using a user name with an Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse if used administrative account type Administrator 2 Open Control Panel from the Windows Start menu then open the System suo Properties dialog 3 Click Hardware tab and then click Driver Signing MEMO Open the Driver Signing Options dialog box Depending on how your system is set up the System Driver Signing Options icon may be displayed directly in the Control Panel the Classic display In this case During hardware installation Windows might detect software that double click the System icon What action
79. can set INPUT SELECT and use USB to record the input sounds from the AUX INPUT jack to your computer and record to a recorder using DIGITAL OUT You can also add effects to the sounds input from the AUX INPUT jack For instructions on setting INPUT SELECT refer to Selecting the Input INPUT SELECT p 19 Using the Digital Output Digital signals are output from the DIGITAL OUT connector on the rear panel You can connect this directly to the digital in connector of a digital recorder or other device and record with no degradation in sound quality ONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE SSIRED OPEI MIC INPUT AUX OUTPUT GUITAR EXP PEDAL DIGITAL USB MIDI POWER AC IN INPUT AMP OUT CTL 1 2 OUT OUT IN USE BOSS BRC li Se IPTOR ONLY E EK BEES Tested To Comply MODI With FCC Standards cL SPECTE TOUTES n BOSS Corporatic ion VENT SUF NEL BROUILLEUR DI Ze Naas FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Digital Recorder 17 Chapter 2 Creating Your Own Favorite Tones Patches What is a Patch The GS 10 can store 200 combinations or sets of effects and parameter settings Each of these sets is called a patch Patches include both User patches and Preset patches Patch Name Input Select Effects Assign 1 8 e Master Noise Suppressor Effect Chain
80. cece Oddd dddd 7 bit Hexadecimal AA BB CC DD Size MSB LSB Binary Osss ssss Ottt tttt Ouuu uuuu Ovvv vvvv 7 bit Hexadecimal SS TT UU VV 90 Address Block Map Address Block 00 00 00 00 E SYSTEM 01 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 01 02 00 00 01 03 00 00 01 04 00 00 01 05 00 00 02 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 03 01 00 00 03 02 00 00 03 03 00 00 03 04 00 00 03 05 00 00 AA 04 00 00 00 Quick Fx 05 00 00 00 Peete tote lee eS 06 00 00 00 rocca a P er d User Patch 06 01 00 00 06 62 00 00 06 63 00 00 EE 07 00 00 00 EE E ROM Patch 07 01 00 00 07 62 00 00 07 63 00 00 EE A 08 00 00 00 SE Temporary Buffer g 09 00 00 00 duldclcliccccccde Temporary Buffer DEE 0A 00 00 00 peeled cce Patch Change ERES 0A 01 00 00 de l2zccoccclccoce2c Patch Write T KR MEUS 0A 02 00 00 GEET Current Patch In A 0A 03 00 00 puleicczcocecrclclrf c Patch Initialize DEE 0A 04 00 00 M AMP Ch Copy D EE 0B 00 00 00 d Quick Fx Number rep DCN EE 0B 01 00 00 ee elc c es Quick Fx Count Ic OC 00 00 00 JLmclcllcclcc tinta TUNER METER Mode TI Individual Refer to Table TUNER Individual Refer to Table OUTPUT Individual Refer to Table DIRECT PATCH Individual Refer to Table MIC Individual Refer to Table SYSTEM Individual Refer to Table MIDI Individual Refer to Table METER In
81. cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth e Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and Data e Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up in another MIDI device e g a sequencer computer or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Memory Backup e This unit contains a battery which powers the unit s memory circuits while the main power is off When this battery becomes weak the message shown below will appear in the display Once you see this message have the battery replaced with a fresh one as soon as possible to avoid the loss of all data in memory To have the battery replaced consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information sheet Battery Low Please Change Additional Precautions e Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the
82. connecting to the guitar input of a stack type guitar amp where the amp and speaker or speakers are separated 16 Chapter 1 Playing Sounds Connecting Audio Devices to the AUX INPUT Jack When using a CD or MD player rhythm machine or similar device for practice connect these device to the AUX INPUT jack on the rear panel IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL I INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION AUX OUTPUT GUITAR EXP PEDAL DIGITAL USB MIDI INPUT AMP OUT CTL 12 OUT OUT IN S cam oW ES INTERFERENCE MIC INPUT FOWER AC IN N USE BOSS BRC PTOR ONLY SSR SER NO m me cm na FCC Stai CANADA Oe vi Fe ge OR OFFICE Ust DR DIBOSS o rhythm DR 3 CD MD Player Rhythm Machine Use the AUX INPUT knob on the front panel to adjust the input volume level for AUX INPUT Setting the input level too high may result in oscillation PATCH VALUE geb nr OUTPUT lt 4 PARAMETER gt SPEAKER OO D O JUMP EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 2 3 4 O LEN NM MN The input sounds from the AUX INPUT jack are mixed with the guitar sounds within the GS 10 making this a convenient feature when using the GS 10 s speakers or headphones The mixed sound is not output from DIGITAL OUT AUX INPUT You
83. connectors are mixed with the effect output DIGITAL our USB 1 EFFECTS ro arti Q AUX PHONES INPUT Bass You can add effects to the signals input from the GUITAR BASS jack when a bass is connected Signals from MIC INPUT are disregarded and the signals input to the GS 10 from the USB or AUX INPUT connectors are mixed with the effect output DIGITAL 0 em EFFECTS AE T O Depending on the type of bass guitar you are using you may not be able to achieve the intended effect if the input level to the GS 10 is excessively high In such cases lower the volume or tone of your bass guitar Microphone You can add effects to the signals input from the MIC INPUT connector Signals from GUITAR BASS jack are disregarded and the signals input to the GS 10 from the USB or AUX INPUT connectors are mixed with the effect output DIGITAL our USB LI EFFECTS GUITARI BASS O GUITAR a AMP OUT O INPUT After setting INPUT SELECT to Microphone you can press PARAMETER I Be to set the mic gain p 20 USB Gtr Mic You can add effects to the signals input from the USB connector for sounds in the guitar and vocal registers Signals from GUITAR BASS and MIC INPUT are disregarded and the signals input to the GS 10 from the AUX INPUT connector are mixed with the effect output DIGITAL USB OUT After setting INPUT SELECT to USB Gtr Mic you can press PARAMETER p
84. destination patch 2 Rotate the VALUE dial to select the save destination User patch This step is unnecessary if the current User patch is acceptable To cancel the Write procedure press EXIT The Play screen returns to the display 3 Press WRITE The GS 10 switches to the write destination patch and you re returned to the Play screen The sound of the patch previously stored at the write destination will be lost once the write is executed Copying Patches You can copy a Preset or User patch to another User patch 3 PATCF f ALUE AUXINPUT OUTPUT PREAMP SPEAKER GAIN BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL fo A N f 0 Y N f X Y ES A 4 d 9 A d J 9 cmko wem A mm D eem E ia CHANNEL SELECT 4 PARAMETER gt USB SPEAKER J CJ L JUMP EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM CJ O O DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 2 3 4 Cl WWW PEDALWAH LIMITER DEFRETTER FX 1 2 TONE MODIFY SLOW GEAR FEEDBACKER A0V COMP TREMOLO GS 1 SUE system HUMANIZER INPUT z with USB AUDIO INTERFACE E uu E E isman eet COS AZ PEDALBEND SHORTDELAY STEREO EQ INS DEL CAPS PHONES GUITAR BASS w 2 4 1 Select the copy source patch refer to How to Switch Patches p 18 2 Press WRITE The screen for specifying the copy destination patch number appears in the display Copy destination patch 3 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to select the copy destination User patch To canc
85. device or Universal Serial Bus Controller to display a list of devices From the list select the unknown device and click Delete In the dialog box that asks you to confirm the deletion click OK Verify that Other device or Unknown device is not displayed in the list and click Close to close the dialog box Windows Found unknown device appears even though you installed the driver d If your computer or USB hub has two or more USB connectors and you connect the GS 10 to a USB connector to which the GS 10 has never been connected before the Unknown device dialog box may appear even on a computer onto which you have already installed the driver Refer to Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows p 126 and install the driver once again This is not a malfunction Windows Driver is not installed correctly gt As described in Deleting the special driver p 173 delete the USB audio device driver that is installed in your computer and then install the GS 10 driver once again as described in Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows p 126 Also check whether there is an Unknown device in Other devices or Universal Serial Bus Controller If you find one delete it Windows Can t install delete use the driver in Windows XP 2000 Ly L Did you log on to Windows as a user with administrative privileges In order to install delete re inst
86. displayed 2 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to set the Knob mode Immediate Turning the knobs immediately changes the values Current Setting Values begin to change only once the knob position reaches the values set in the patch 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Chapter 7 Convenient Functions and System Settings Checking the Effect Output Level with the Level Meter You can meter the output level of each effect This is handy for checking the effects output levels PATCH ALUE AUX INPUT OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL a PARAMETER USB SPEAKER C JUMP N ff EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM CECI CJ CJ TAP DIR ICT PATCH TUNER 1 3 4 NAME NS C CE E E EQ MASTER CJ 6 IQ 90172 zrecrs svsrew HORUS H INPUT with USE AUDIO INTERFACE SUGER FX2 ASSIGN SELECT CN 9 L AZ HORT DELAY STEREO EQ INS DEL CAPS PHONES GUITAR BASS w 1 Press METER 2 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to select the effect whose level you want to check Effects are shown in lowercase letters when turned off You can check the level of signals being input to the INPUT jack by selecting Input Selecting Output allows you to check the level of signals output from the GS 10 You may not be able to achieve the effects you envision if your output levels are set too high Adjust the output level of each of your effects to the optimum value while checking the meter and making sure the needle do
87. distortion This is a sound suited to blues FLIP TOP This models a Ampeg B 15 This clean sound is great for use with bass guitars Bass Clean This is a crunch sound with natural distor Bass Crunch tion that sounds great with bass guitars This is a crunch sound with wild distor Wild Crunch This is a high gain sound suitable for use tion with bass guitars Mic Preamp Preamp suitable for vocals Custom 1 Custom amp 1 This models the drive sound of a VOX AC VO Drive 30TB VO Lead This models the lead sound of the VOX Custom 2 Custom amp 2 AC OTB Custom 3 Custom amp 3 MATCH Drive This models the sound input to left input on a Matchless D C 30 When the type is set to CONCERT 810 SESSION BASS Fat MATCH This models the sound of a MATCHLESS 360 T E B MAN FLIP TOP Bass Clean Bass Crunch S with a modified high gain Bass HiGain or Mic Preamp set OUTPUT SELECT p 16 BG Lead This models the lead sound of the MESA as shown below to match the GS 10 to the type of amp to be Boogie combo amp connected BG Dri This models a MESA Boogie with TREBLE rive SHIFT SW on When connecting to an audio amp or similar equipment This models the rhythm channel of a Line Phones sii LL MESA Boogie Smooth Drive This is a smooth drive sound When connecting to a guitar amp This models the sound input to Input I on a Combo Amp or Combo Return Baies Marshall 1959 This models the sound input to Input II
88. for assigning various functions are transmitted together with the Standard messages Use the software to set the operations to be performed by means of these Note messages Settings examples are given on p 76 and p 77 Please refer to these examples STOP 90 00 00 900201 900200 900000 FC START 900000 900401 900400 90 00 00 FA About Note Messages When START is activated the following messages are output Note 00 On 90 00 01 Note 04 On 90 04 01 Note 04 Off 90 04 00 Note 00 Off 90 00 00 FA Note Messages for Assigning Functions Note 04 E 1 Note Messages for Remote Control Note 00 C 1 Messages are similarly output for Reset Stop Play Rec The following shows the correspondence between the functions and the Note messages used in assigning them Note Note Name Key 05 F 1 04 E 1 07 G 1 The note name Key may differ depending on the application used and the settings you may wish to refer to the relevant manual for details Note messages are transmitted over the selected transmission channel p 69 When set to MMC MIDI Machine Control is transmitted STOP FO 7F 7F 06 01 F7 START F07F7F06 02 F7 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen 75 un o A e 00 Chapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected Controlling the Device Remotely With the GS 10 you can control external MIDI devices Making the Connections
89. gee eee ee RT TT RT 12 Short Delay un 48 OUTPUT LEVEL LLL uuu 11 15 Slicer enean T 49 Output Level EE 15 SOW GEAT cansan aaa ativataundeas 39 OUTPUT SELECT sciiti 16 SPEAKER ON OFF un 11 15 Overdrive Distortion AAL 32 SAKAM EECH 16 Stack E NEE 16 DUALLY d WEE 70 rC E E 52 SUSTAIN M 10 21 OSTEN Uto eoe C DA EU LEE 11 175 bla 11 Tone MOUI ditm M 37 TREBCE Srne 10 21 En e E 39 TUNER ilaele 11 liner auido 64 U UNEN A E 47 SB E 11 12 78 83 IOrtect Montor E 79 Direct Monitor Command 79 Driver e E 80 Inp t EE 78 CUD UL LEVEL e 78 dE Ee 79 Ee ecc TUN 20 81 USD Gib VIC sica peel un oet pubis 19 81 USB DEVE rela seite leat im use us 125 IEN EE 18 V ANDES na Ro RN NO NE MSc HA HIR UI USE 46 W OC KEE 11 25 27 176 177 For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plu
90. improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory in another MIDI device e g a sequencer or computer e Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored in another MIDI device e g a sequencer or computer once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data e Usea reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions e Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display e When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements e To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night IMPORTANT NOTES When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfuncti
91. included CD ROM is used in this mode This is set to Advanced when shipped from the factory P Press EXIT to return to the Play screen If the driver for the set mode has not yet been installed at this point you need to turn off the power to the GS 10 and install the driver d Quit any sequencer software and any other computer applications used by the GS 10 9 Switch off the GS 10 then turn it on again The corresponding driver is installed on the computer MIDI in Standard Driver Mode Normally it s better to use MIDI in the Advanced driver mode With the factory settings the Standard driver mode is compatible only with audio If Standard is selected as the driver mode with an OS standard driver that is compatible with both audio and MIDI data you can use both audio and MIDI with the standard driver by making the following settings thas been confirmed that standard Windows XP 2000 Me 98 and Mac OS X 9 8 drivers are not supported or that problems may occur due to their use 1 Press USB 2 Press PARAMETER B so that Std Drv Func is displayed 3 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to set the standard driver function Audio Only audio is used Audio amp MIDI Both audio and MIDI are used 4 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen 9 Quitany sequencer software and any other computer applications used by the GS 10 6 Turn off the power to the GS 10 and
92. is not running A The Main Volume slider will not move 161 Setting the Special Driver s Functions Adjusting the audio latency When using the GS 10 in Advanced mode you can change the driver settings to adjust the latency of the audio To adjust the latency change the Buffer Size in the driver settings dialog box l As described in Opening the special driver settings dialog box p 163 open the Driver Settings dialog box 2 Adjust the driver buffer size The following setting will produce the shortest latency Windows Set Audio Buffer Size to the far left Min Macintosh Set Buffer Size to the far left Min 3 Click OK to close the driver settings dialog box 4 Restart the application that is using the GS 10 If you are using an application that has a function for testing audio devices get it to perform its tests 9 Play back audio data on your application If interruptions occur in the sound repeat this procedure and gradually increase the buffer size specified in step 2 until interruptions no longer occur Depending on the application you are using there may be a buffer size or latency adjustment function among the audio settings of the application as well For details refer to the operation manual for your application Using ASIO Direct Monitor If you are using the GS 10 from an ASIO 2 0 compatible application switching of the GS 10 s output signals Swit
93. is the sound of the BOSS OD 1 This models an Ibanez TS 808 Natural OD This is an overdrive sound that provides a natural sounding distortion This is an overdrive sound that works well Bass OD with bass guitars This gives a basic traditional distortion sound This models a Proco RAT GUV DS This models an Marshall GUV NOR This is a distortion sound that provides a mild distortion This is a distortion sound featuring an edge effect DST RMAN Thismodelsa ROCKMAN This is a distortion sound with a boosted Loud low end This is a distortion sound with a boosted high end This distortion sound boosts the low and high ends yielding a mechanical sounding distortion This models a FUZZFACE This models an ACETONE FUZZ This models an Electro Harmonix Big Muff x Custom OD DS 1 Custom OD DS 2 Custom OD DS3 When CUSTOM 1 3 is selected for Type You can set the following parameters when TYPE is set to Custom 1 3 IS Customizing Overdrive and Distortion p 56 EDIT CUSTOM DS 1 3 Parameter Value Type OD 1 OD 2 CRUNCH DS 1 DS 2 METAL 1 METAL 2 FUZZ Bottom 50 50 Top 50 50 Low 50 50 High 50 50 Drive Adjusts the depth of distortion Bass Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range Treble Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range Effect Level Adjusts the volume of the overdrive distortion sound Direct Level Adjusts the
94. jack are output as Control Change messages Such messages can be used to among other things manipulate the parameters of an external MIDI device Transmitting Data You can use Exclusive messages to transmit the settings for effect sounds and other content stored in the GS 10 to other MIDI devices For example you can provide another GS 10 with the same settings and save effect sound settings to a sequencer or other device Remotely Controlling the GS 10 Using an External MIDI Device Switching Patch Numbers When the GS 10 receive Program Change messages from the external MIDI device its patches are simultaneously switched NEM You can set up the correspondence between MIDI Program Change messages and the GS 10 s patches using the Program Change Map p 73 You may need to work on these correspondences when you want to line up some effects in combination with other MIDI devices The connections shown in the figure below are for a sequencer automatically performing the backing as a guitar is being played The patches are switched automatically when the program numbers corresponding to the patches are input along with the performance data at the points where you have determined the GS 10 patches are to be switched Piri 0000 Cj C fi MIDI OUT E MIDI IN CI SE Se II ce
95. power switch turned OFF use the USB cable to connect the GS 10 to your computer Make sure that the GS 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL is set to the lowest setting then switch ON the POWER switch The GS 10 will be detected automatically and the driver will be installed When installation is complete restart Windows Next you need to make the driver settings p 141 136 you Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to other devices MEM This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows B Windows Me users l With the GS 10 disconnected start up Windows Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse if used 2 Exitall currently running software applications Note Also close any open windows If you are using virus checking or similar software be sure to exit it NEE aswell devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the 3 Before connecting the USB cable switch the GS 10 s driver mode to Standard wrong order you risk causing For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 malfunction and or damage to other devices 4 With the power switch turned OFF use the USB
96. range tone Level Adjusts the volume after the equalizer Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters NAME NS MASTER You can select the following items in NAME NS MASTER e Name Patch Name e Noise Suppressor e Master e Foot Volume e Effect Chain With each press of INAME NS MASTERI you move to the next item that can be set in this order Name Noise Suppressor Master Foot Volume gt Effect Chain Name Patch Name Each patch can be given a name Patch Name consisting of up to sixteen characters You ll probably want to take advantage of this feature by assigning names that suggest the sound you ll obtain or the song in which it ll be used 1 Press NAME NS MASTER so that the Name edit screen appears in the display Press PARAMETER I Be to move the cursor to the text area you want to edit 9 Rotate the PATCH V ALUE dial to change the characters You can use the following functions when changing text characters CAPS Switches the character at the cursor position between upper and lower case INS Inserts a blank space at the cursor position DEL Deletes the character at the cursor position and shifts the characters following it to the left gt If you want to edit names further repeat Steps 2 and 3 Si If you want to save the sequence you ve set up use the Write procedure p 25 to save it to a User patch Press EXIT to return to the Play s
97. the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Lo Depth Low Depth Adjust the depth of the chorus effect for the low frequency range If you wish to use this as a doubling effect use a setting of 0 Lo PreDly Low Pre Delay Adjust the time from when the low frequency range direct sound is output until the effect sound is output Extending the pre delay will produce the sensation of multiple sounds doubling effect Lo Level Low Level Adjust the volume of the low frequency range Hi Rate High Rate Adjust the speed of the chorus effect for the high frequency range When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes tt easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Hi Depth High Depth Adjust the depth of the chorus effect for the high frequency range If you wish to use this as a doubling effect use a setting of 0 Hi PreDly
98. then turn the unit on again For more on installing the drivers refer to Installing amp Setup the USB Driver p 125 Chapter 9 Using the GS 10 Connected to a Computer Via USB Recording the GS 10 s Output with a Computer Set your application such as a sequencer so that the audio input port it uses is the GS 10 You can freely set the point in the signal chain from which to extract the signal to be sent to the computer with Effect Chain p 24 For example by setting this so that the computer records the signals as they are at the beginning of the chain you can record the sounds without any effects added while you listen to the performance with the effects applied from the speakers If you are using the software to send the audio data through set Direct Monitor p 79 to Off Applying Effects with the GS 10 to a Computer s Audio Playback Set the audio output port used by applications to the GS 10 You can use the GS 10 to add effects to audio data played back from the computer and then record these sounds back to the computer Use this feature when you want to add effects to existing audio data 1 Press INPUT SELECTI 2 Use the PATCH VALUE dial to select one of the following settings USB Gtr Mic Effects are applied to guitar and vocal sounds from the computer USB Bass Effects are applied to bass sounds from the computer 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen The flow of a
99. to Table Patch 03 16 00 00 00 02 00 01 PRE SP Mic Distance Refer to Table Patch xx 03 18 00 00 00 02 00 0A PRE SP Mic Position Refer to Table Patch 03 1A 00 00 00 02 00 64 PRE SP Mic Level xx 03 1C 00 00 00 02 00 64 PRE SP Direct Level EQ 04 00 00 00 00 02 00 28 EQ Low EQ 04 02 00 00 00 02 00 1B EQ Low Middle Frequency Refer to Table EQ Middle Frequency 04 04 00 00 00 02 00 05 EQ Low Middle Q Refer to Table EQ Middle Q 04 06 00 00 00 02 00 28 EQ Low Middle EQ 04 08 00 00 00 02 00 1B EQ High Middle Frequency Refer to Table EQ Middle Frequency 04 0A 00 00 00 02 00 05 EQ High Middle Q Refer to Table EQ Middle Q 04 OC 00 00 00 02 00 28 EQ High Middle EQ 04 OE 00 00 00 02 00 28 EQ High EQ 04 10 00 00 00 02 00 28 EQ Level FX 2 05 00 00 00 00 02 00 11 FX2 FX Select 05 02 00 00 00 02 00 03 PH Type Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 71 FL Rate Refer to Table Rate 00 00 00 02 00 02 HR Voice Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 02 PS Voice Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 03 OC Range Refer to Table OC Range 00 00 00 02 00 30 PB Pitch Min 00 00 00 02 00 10 2CE Xover Frequency Refer to Table Xover Frequency 00 00 00 02 00 64 PAN Wave Shape 00 00 00 02 00 71 VB Rate Refer to Table Rate 00 00 00 02 00 71 UV Rate Refer to Table Rate 00 00 00 02 00 01 RT
100. to return to the Play screen If you want to save a tone with the settings you ve made use the Write procedure p 25 to save the tone to a User patch Making More Precise Effect Settings Each effect comprises several different kinds of parameters You can more precisely create the sounds you want by editing each of these parameters individually 3 2 PATCE f ALUE AUX IPUT OUTPUT PREAMP SPEAKER GAIN BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 4 C WWW 6 IQ 9 725 rcrs system with USB AUDIO INTERFACE i EC Eb DEL CAPS GU BASS 1 Press the on off button for the effect with the settings you want to change The parameters for the selected effect appear in the display 2 Press PARAMETER a B to select the parameter whose settings are to be changed When more than one parameter is shown in the display press PARAMETER Be to move the cursor to the parameter to be set ven You can jump to the core parameters by pressing PARAMETER or B while holding down PARAMETER B or e With items for which there aren t that many parameters the GS 10 jumps to the last or first parameter 3 Rotate the VALUE dial to change the value of a setting 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for any other parameter settings you want to change 5 Ifyou further want to change parameter settings in any other effects repeat Steps 1 through 4 6 Press EXI
101. tone for the high frequency range Presence Adjusts the tone for the ultra high frequency range Level Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp Be careful not to raise the Level setting too high Bright Turns the bright setting on off Off Bright is not used On Bright is switched on to create a lighter and crisper tone Depending on the Type setting this may not be displayed Gain SW Provides for selection from three levels of distortion Low Middle and High Distortion will successively increase for settings of Low Middle and High The sound of each Type is created on the basis that the Gain is set to Middle So normally set it to Middle SP Type Speaker Type This turns off the speaker simulation This is the built in speaker of the amp you selected with Type This is a compact open back speaker cabi 1x8 net with one 8 inch speaker 5 This is a compact open back speaker cabi 1x10 net with one 10 inch speaker o This is a compact open back speaker cabi 1x12 net with one 12 inch speaker y This is a compact open back speaker cabi 1x15 net with one 15 inch speaker y This is a compact open back speaker cabi 1x18 1 net with one 18 inch speaker 2x12 This is a general open back speaker cabinet with two 12 inch speakers 2x15 This is a general open back speaker cabinet with two 15 inch speakers This is an optimal speaker cabinet for a 4x10 large enclosed amp
102. use the GS 10 not just with your guitar but as an audio interface for input of sounds from bass guitars mics and external stereo equipment The GS 10 also includes amp types and effects for basses giving you total song creation capabilities all in one single device Stereo Monitor Speakers Built In The GS 10 comes with its own monitor speakers so you can enjoy creating and performing music all with one unit GS 10 Editor and GS 10 Librarian Included In addition to intuitive knob controls the GS 10 also includes the Editor software for use in creating sounds and Librarian software for managing the tones you have created These softwares let you perform the procedures for creating sounds and changing effect connection sequences easily from your computer screen WDM ASIO Compatible USB Driver The GS 10 comes with a GS 10 exclusive driver for stable high quality recording and playback Now enjoy high quality audio recordings with 24 bit and ASIO applications COSM Composite Object Sound Modeling Composite Object Sound Modeling COSM is Roland s innovative and powerful sound modeling technology COSM analyzes the many factors that make up the original sound such as the electrical and physical characteristics of the original and then produces a digital model that can reproduce the same sound Panel Descriptions Front Panel REAMP SPEAKER MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL CHANNEL SELECT A a ae
103. volume of the direct sound 32 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters DELAY This effect adds delayed sound to the direct sound giving more body to the sound or creating special effects Parameter Value On Off Off On Type Single Pan Stereo DlyTime 0 ms 1800 ms BPM 2 BPM Delay Time F 0 msec 20 msec Tap Time 096 1009 Type Pan Feedback 0 100 High Cut 700 Hz 11 0 kHz Flat Effect Level 0 120 On Off Effect On Off Turns the DELAY Effect on off Type This selects which type of delay Single By adjusting the delay time and feedback you can obtain a normal delay effect Pan This delay is specifically for stereo output This allows you to obtain the tap delay effect that divides the delay time then deliver them to L and R channels Feedback pum DELAY Delay Time Effect Level INPUT OUTPUTL Effect Level OUTPUT R Stereo The direct sound is output from the left channel and the effect sound is output from the right channel DlyTime Delay Time This determines the delay time When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the time to twice or four times the time length of the BPM when the set time is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER Be to display the
104. with four 10 inch speakers This is an optimal speaker cabinet for a 4x12 large enclosed amp with four 12 inch speakers n This is a double stack of two cabinets each 8x10 with four 10 inch speakers n This is a double stack of two cabinets each 8x12 i with four 12 inch speakers Custom speaker 1 Custom speaker 2 When Custom 1 2 is selected for SP Type You can set the following parameters when SP Type is set to Custom 1 2 IS Customizing the Speakers p 56 Original Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters EDIT CUSTOM SP 1 2 Parameter Value Speaker Size 5 15 Color Low 10 10 Color High 10 10 Speaker Num x1 x2 x4 x8 Cabinet Open Close Mic Type This setting selects the simulated mic type General dynamic mic used for instruments DYN57 and vocals Optimal for use in miking gui tar amps DYN421 Dynamic mic with extended low end CND451 Small condenser mic for use with instru ments CND87 Condenser mic with flat response Simulates a mic with perfectly flat re sponse Produces a sonic image close to that of listening to the sound directly from the speakers on site FLAT Mic Dis Mic Distance Simulates the distance between the mic and speaker Off Mic This setting points the mic away from the speaker On Mic Provides conditions whereby the mic is directed more towards the speaker Mic Pos Mic Position This simulates the microph
105. 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 00 00 00 00 01 11 03 30 64 00 00 02 33 PRE SP Bright PRE SP Gain SW PRE SP Speaker Type PRE SP Mic Type PRE SP Mic Distance PRE SP Mic Position PRE SP Mic Level PRE SP Direct Level PRE SP Type PRE SP Gain PRE SP Bass PRE SP Middle PRE SP Treble PRE SP Presence PRE SP Amp Level PRE SP Bright PRE SP Gain SW PRE SP Speaker Type PRE SP Mic Type PRE SP Mic Distance PRE SP Mic Position PRE SP Mic Level PRE SP Direct Level EQ 0n Off EQ Low EQ EQ Low Middle Frequency EQ Low Middle Q EQ Low Middle EQ EQ High Middle Frequency EQ High Middle Q EQ High Middle EQ EQ High EQ EQ Level FX2 0n Off FX2 FX Select PH Type PH Rate PH Depth PH Manual PH Resonance PH Step Rate PH Effect Level PH Direct Level FL Rate FL Depth FL Manual FL Resonance FL Separation FL Low Cut Filter FL Effect Level FL Direct Level HR Voice HR HR1 Harmony HR HR1 Pre Delay HR HR1 Feedback HR HR1 Level HR HR2 Harmony HR HR2 Pre Delay HR HR2 Level HR Key HR Direct Level PS Voice PS PS1 Mode PS PS1 Pitch PS PS1 Fine PS PS1 Pre Delay PS PS1 Feedback PS PS1 L
106. 0 CHORUS 08 00 00 00 08 01 00 00 08 02 00 00 08 03 00 00 08 04 00 00 08 05 00 00 08 06 00 00 08 07 00 00 REVERB 09 00 00 00 09 01 00 00 09 02 00 00 09 03 00 00 09 04 00 00 09 05 00 00 09 06 00 00 xx 09 07 00 00 MASTER OA 00 00 00 OA 01 00 00 0A 02 OA 03 00 00 OA 04 00 00 OA 05 00 00 OA 06 00 00 INPUT SELECT OB 00 00 00 EFFECT CHAIN 0C 00 00 00 0C 01 00 00 0C 02 00 00 0C 03 00 00 0C 04 00 00 OC 05 00 00 DC 06 00 00 OC 07 00 00 DC 08 00 00 0C 09 00 00 OC 0A 00 00 0C OB 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 28 28 01 64 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 52 01 64 64 05 The same effect cannot be used more than once NAME OD 00 00 00 aa 0D 01 00 00 amp OD OF 00 00 ASSIGN 1 OE 00 00 00 xx OE 01 00 00 amp OE 02 kk OE 03 00 00 kk OE 04 kk OE 05 00 00 amp OE 06 xx OE 07 00 00 a OE 08 00 00 kk OE 09 00 00 xx OE OA 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 02 02 02 01 01 01 01 20 20 00 7F 7F 01 00 00 01 7F XX XX XX XX XX XX XX 00 00
107. 0 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 2 Source Act Range Low 0 127 OF OA 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 2 Source Act Range High 0 127 ASSIGN 3 10 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 3 0n Off 00 Off 01 On xx 10 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 ASSIGN 3 Target Refer to Table Target xx 10 02 01 7F 10 03 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 3 Target Min Target Param Min Data Target Param Max 10 04 XX XX 10 05 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 3 Target Max Target Param Min Data Target Param Max xx 10 067 XX xx 10 07 00 00 00 01 00 41 ASSIGN 3 Source Refer to Table Source xx x 10 08 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 3 Source Mode 00 Normal 01 Toggle 10 09 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 3 Source Act Range Low 0 127 10 0A 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 3 Source Act Range High 0 127 ASSIGN 4 11 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 4 0n Off 00 Off 01 On xx 11 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 ASSIGN 4 Target Refer to Table Target 11 02 01 7F 1 03 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 4 Target Min Target Param Min Data Target Param Max 11 04 XX XX 11 05 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 4 Target Max Target Param Min Data Target Param Max xx 11 067 XX XX 1 07 00 00 00 01 00 41 ASSIGN 4 Source Refer to Table Source 11 08 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 4 Source Mode 00 Normal 01 Toggle 11 09 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 4 Source Act Range Low 0
108. 0 08 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 F 03 00 08 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 F 03 00 08 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 G 03 00 08 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 Ab 03 00 08 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 A 03 00 08 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 Bb 03 00 08 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 9 B Scale 10 03 00 09 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 09 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 Db 03 00 09 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 D 03 00 09 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 Eb 03 00 09 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 E 03 00 09 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 F 03 00 09 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 P 03 00 09 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 G 03 00 09 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 Ab 03 00 09 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 A 03 00 09 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 Bb 03 00 09 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 10 B Scale 11 03 00 0A 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 0A 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 Db 03 00 0A 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 D 03 00 0A 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 Eb 03 00 0A 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 E 03 00 0A 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 F 03 00 0A 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 F 03 00 0A 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 G 03 00 0A 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 Ab 03 00 0A 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 A 03 00 0A 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 Bb 03 00 0A OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 11 B Scale 12 03 00 OB
109. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 04 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 64 00 02 00 28 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 00 902 33 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 71 00 0B 00 64 00 1B 00 72 00 0A 00 64 00 71 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 05 00 64 00 64 00 39 00 64 00 64 00 64 DO 01 00 64 00 28 00 64 00 64 00 00 2 102 33 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 28 00 03 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 28 00 64 00 30 AR Sensitivity SYN Octave Shift BS SEQ Low Middle EQ Refer PH Resonance FL Separation HR HR1 Feedback PS PS1 Pre Delay Refer OC PB Direct Level 2CE Low Level PAN RT Fall Time SDD HU Rate SL AR Key SYN PWM Rate BS SEQ High Middle Frequency Refer Refer Refer Refer PH Step Rate FL Low Cut Filter HR HR1 Level PS PS1 Pre Delay LSB OC PB 2CE High Rate PAN VB UV RT Depth SDD HU Depth SL AR Attack SYN PWM Depth BS SEQ High Middle Q Refer Refer PH Effect Level FL Effect Level HR HR2 Harmony PS PS1 Feedback OC PB 2CE High Depth PA
110. 00 30 Scale 1 Ab 03 00 00 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 1 A 03 00 00 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 1 Bb 03 00 00 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 1 B Scale 2 03 00 01 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 01 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 Db 03 00 01 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 D 03 00 01 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 Eb 03 00 01 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 E 03 00 01 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 F 03 00 01 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 F 03 00 01 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 G 03 00 01 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 Ab 03 00 01 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 A 03 00 01 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 Bb 03 00 01 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 2 B Scale 3 03 00 02 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 02 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 Db 03 00 02 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 D 03 00 02 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 Eb 03 00 02 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 E 03 00 02 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 F 03 00 02 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 F 03 00 02 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 G 03 00 02 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 Ab 03 00 02 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 A 03 00 02 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 Bb 03 00 02 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 3 B Scale 4 03 00 03 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 4 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 03 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 4 Db 03 00 03 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 4 D 03 00 03 03 00 00 00 0
111. 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 G 03 00 12 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 Ab 03 00 12 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 A 03 00 12 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 Bb 03 00 12 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 19 B Scale 20 03 00 13 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 13 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 Db 03 00 13 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 D 03 00 13 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 Eb 03 00 13 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 E 03 00 13 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 F 03 00 13 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 F 03 00 13 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 G 03 00 13 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 Ab 03 00 13 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 A 03 00 13 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 Bb 03 00 13 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 20 B Scale 21 03 00 14 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 14 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 Db 03 00 14 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 D 03 00 14 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 Eb 03 00 14 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 E 03 00 14 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 F 03 00 14 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 F 03 00 14 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 G 03 00 14 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 Ab 03 00 14 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 A 03 00 14 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 Bb 03 00 14 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 21 B Scale 22 03 00 15 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 22 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note
112. 00 02 00 00 Direct Patch 4 00 00 U001 User 01 01 00 07 01 47 00 63 U100 User 00 64 P101 Preset 00 7F P128 Preset 01 00 P129 Preset 01 47 P200 Preset Table MIC lt SYSTEM MIC gt Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 01 02 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 0A Mic Gain 00 0 01 10 02 20 0A 100 Table SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM gt Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 01 03 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 OF LCD Contrast 1 16 01 03 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 01 Speaker Output 00 OFF 01 ON 01 03 00 02 00 00 00 02 00 00 01 47 Patch Extent 00 00 001 User 01 03 00 03 S 00 63 100 User 00 64 101 Preset 00 7F 128 Preset 01 00 129 Preset 01 47 200 Preset 01 03 00 04 00 00 00 01 00 01 Assign Hold 00 OFF 01 ON 01 03 00 05 00 00 00 01 00 01 Knob Mode 00 Immediate 01 Current Setting 01 03 00 06 00 00 00 01 00 05 Exp Pedal Function 00 Auto 01 Assignl 8 02 Foot Volume 03 Patch Level 04 Pedal Wah 05 Pedal Bend 01 03 00 07 00 00 00 01 00 0A CTL1 Function 00 Assignl 8 01 TUNER On Off 02 Remote Start Stop 03 Direct Patch Up 04 Direct Patch Down 05 Patch Up 06 Patch Down 07 Patch Level Incl 08 Patch Level Inc2 09 Patch Level Decl 0A Patch Level Dec2 01 03 00 08 00 00 00 01 00 0A CTL2 Function 00 Assignl 8 01 TUNER On Off 02 Remote Start Stop 03 Direct Patch Up 04 Direct Patch Down 05 Patch Up 06 Patch Down 07 Patch Level Incl
113. 00 02 OD RM Effect Level 00 00 02 OE RM Direct Level 00 00 02 OF FB Mode 00 00 03 00 FB Rise Time 00 00 03 01 FB Rise Time 00 00 03 02 FB F B Level 00 00 03 03 FB F B Level 00 00 03 04 FB Vibrato Rate 00 00 03 05 FB Vibrato Dept 00 00 03 06 CS 0n Off 00 00 03 07 CS Sustain 00 00 03 08 CS Level 00 00 03 09 OD 0On Off 00 00 03 0A OD Type 00 00 03 OB OD Drive 00 00 03 OC OD Bass 00 00 03 OD OD Treble 00 00 03 OE OD Effect Level 00 00 03 OF OD Direct Level 00 00 04 00 PRE SP On Off 00 00 04 01 PRE SP Channel Select 00 00 04 02 PRE SP Type 00 00 04 03 PRE SP Gain 00 00 04 04 PRE SP Bass 00 00 04 05 PRE SP Middle 00 00 04 06 PRE SP Treble 00 00 04 07 PRE SP Presence 00 00 04 08 PRE SP Amp Level 00 00 04 09 PRE SP Bright 00 00 04 OA PRE SP Gain SW 00 00 04 OB PRE SP Speaker Type 00 00 04 OC PRE SP Mic Type 00 00 04 OD PRE SP Mic Distance 00 00 04 OE PRE SP Mic Position 00 00 04 OF PRE SP Mic Level 00 00 05 00 PRE SP Direct Level 00 00 05 01 EQ 0n Off 00 00 05 02 EQ Low EQ 00 00 05 03 EQ Low Middle Frequency 00 00 05 04 EQ Low Middle Q 00 00 05 05 EQ Low Middle EQ 00 00 05 06 EQ High Middle Frequency 00 00 05 07 EQ High Middle Q 00 00 05 08 EQ High Middle EQ 00 00 05 09 EQ High EQ 00 00 05 OA EQ Level 00 00 05 OB FX2 0n Off 00 00 05 OC FX2 FX Select 00 00 05 OD PH Type 00 00 05 OE PH Rate 00 00 05 OF PH Depth 00 00 06 00 PH Manual 00 00 06 01 PH Resonance
114. 03SOSS Owner s Manual GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM with USB AUDIO INTERFACE Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the BOSS GS 10 Guitar Effects System with USB Audio Interface Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled e USING THE UNIT SAFELY page 2 3 e IMPORTANT NOTES page 4 5 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Owner s manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference E Printing Conventions in This Manual e Text or numerals enclosed in square brackets indicate buttons WRITE WRITE button USB USB button e Reference such as p indicate pages in this manual to which you can refer Copyright 2003 BOSS CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of BOSS CORPORATION SSS ipe Oa a SSO PATCH VALUE Bt GAIN d DOLE RER gi LEVEL EE UE ooo CHANNEL SELECT m O O JJ em m CD O Cc A DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 2 3 4 PEDALWAH e LIMITER e DEFRETTER EX 1 NAMEZNS O AUTO WAH ENHANCER RING MOD EQ MASTER ADV COMP dali OC oO GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM INPUT QUICK GS 1 with USB AUDIO INTERFACE oF X 2 ASSIGN
115. 0A Custom2 OQ 03 05 01 02 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Range Low 03 05 01 03 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Range High 03 05 01 04 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Presence 03 05 02 00 00 00 00 01 00 04 Custom3 Type 03 05 02 01 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 OQ 03 05 02 02 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Range Low 03 05 02 03 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Range High 03 05 02 04 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Presence 103 E Oo D 5 2 le rn Appendices Table Quick Fx Data Quick Fx Data Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 04 00 Pl Read Only 04 01 P2 Read Only 04 02 P3 Read Only 04 03 P4 Read Only how Hh Separate the upper four and lower four bits assigning them to different bytes Tt v and process them in sequence beginning with the upper bits t o i Example Processing 64H EN d 06H Odd address si l 04H Even address FX 1 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 0A FX1 FX Select Refer to Table Patch 00 02 00 00 00 02 00 09 PW Type Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 01 AW Mode Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 OC TM Type Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 02 ACS Type Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 02 LM Type Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 64 ENH Sensitivity 00 00 00 02 00 64 SG Sensitivity 00 00 00 02 00 64 TR Wave Shape 00 00 00 02 00 64 DF Tone 00 00 00 02 00 01 RM Mode Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 01 FB Mode Refer to Tab
116. 1 40H 5FH 64 95 vv Value 00H 7FH 0 127 Control numbers 00H and 20H are recognized as Bank Select messages 00H For values of 01H or lower the Program Change Map will be switched according to the value For values of 02H or higher the received data will be ignored 20H The received data will be ignored regardless of the value By specifying this as a Source for Assign p 60 you can use these messages to control a Target e Program Change Status Second CnH ppH n MIDI Channel Number pp Program Number OH FH ch 1 ch 16 00H 7FH No 1 No 128 Patches will be selected according to the program number that is received There are two Program Change Maps which are referenced when selecting programs and these are switched by Bank Select messages ESYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE e Timing Clock Status F8H Active Sensing Status FEH When an Active Sensing message is received the interval of all subsequent messages will begin to be monitored If an interval greater than 400 msec between messages the display will indicate MIDI Off Line BSYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE Status Data Byte Status FOH iiH ddH eeH F7H POH System Exclusive ii Manufacturer ID 41H Roland dd ee Data 00H 7FH 0 127 F7H EOX End of Exclusive System common For more details please refer to Roland Exclusive Message 2 TRANSMITTED DATA BCHANNEL VOI
117. 1 00 30 Scale 4 Eb 03 00 03 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 4 E 03 00 03 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 4 F 03 00 03 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 4 F 03 00 03 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 4 G 03 00 03 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 4 Ab 03 00 03 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 4 A 03 00 03 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 4 Bb 03 00 03 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 4 B Scale 5 03 00 04 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 04 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 Db 03 00 04 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 D 03 00 04 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 Eb 03 00 04 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 E 03 00 04 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 F 03 00 04 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 F 03 00 04 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 G 03 00 04 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 Ab 03 00 04 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 A 03 00 04 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 Bb 03 00 04 OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 5 B Scale 6 03 00 05 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 6 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 05 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 6 Db 03 00 05 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 6 D 03 00 05 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 6 Eb 03 00 05 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 6 E 03 00 05 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 6 F 03 00 05 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 6 P 03 00 05 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 6 G 03 00 05 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 6 Ab 03 00 05 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 6 A 03 00 05 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 6 Bb 03 00 05 OB 00 00 00 01 00
118. 1 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Step2 03 01 00 02 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Step3 03 01 00 03 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Step4 03 01 00 04 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Step5 03 01 00 05 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Step6 03 01 00 06 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Step7 03 01 00 07 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Step8 03 01 00 08 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Step9 03 01 00 09 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Stepl0 03 01 00 0A 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Stepll 03 01 00 OB 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Step12 03 01 00 OC 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Step13 03 01 00 OD 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Stepl4 03 01 00 OE 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Stepl5 03 01 00 OF 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Stepl6 03 01 00 10 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Stepl Refer to Table AR Step Note 03 01 00 11 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Step2 03 01 00 12 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Step3 03 01 00 13 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Step4 03 01 00 14 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Step5 03 01 00 15 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Step6 03 01 00 16 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Step7 03 01 00 17 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Step8 03 01 00 18 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Step9 03 01 00 19 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Stepl0 03 01 00 1A 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Step11 03 01 00 1B 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Step12 03 01 00 1C 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Stepl13 03 01 00 1D 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 Db Stepl4 03 01 00 lE 00 00 00 01 00
119. 1 is switched on and off with the foot switch FX 2 is switched on and off with DLY TIME TAP The foot switch is used for tap in put of the delay time The foot switch is used for tap in M BEMAN put of the Master BPM The foot switch is used for switch CH SEL INC ing the preamp speaker channel select A gt B gt C gt A The foot switch function is enabled for the foot switch connected to CTL 1 Chapter 6 Setting the External Pedal Functions Manual Settings Here you can individually determine which controller is to control which parameter 5 24 AUX INPUT OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL 4 N 7 gt Y w CELE A B C DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 2 3 4 C Cn fe GS 10 GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM 3 2x2 CHORUS HUMANIZER with USB AUDIO INTERFACE VIBRATO AUTO RIFF SERI 9 Am SCH QJ PHONES GUITAR BASS v 1 3 1 Press ASSIGN 2 Press PARAMETER Be to select one of the Assigns from Assign 1 8 3 Press ASSIGNI to set the selected Assign to On Each time ASSIGN is pressed it alternately switches this on and off ASSIGN flashes in the display when the Assign is switched on Always set any Assign that is not going to be used to Off 4 Press PARAMETER lt B to display the following screens Target value range Min Target value range Max UN Source Mode Active Range Low Piaf f sb Active Range High 5 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial t
120. 10 CONCERT 810 P198 OC HiGAIN Bass A T E B MAN Bass HiGain P199 B MANIAC Bass A B MAN B MAN B MAN P200 DI CLEAN Bass A Mic Preamp Mic Preamp Bass Clean With the factory settings the content of the User patches is the same as that of the Preset patches Patches with Mic appended to the name are for use with mics Sound from the GUITAR BASS jack won t be heard Patches with Bass appended to the name are for use with basses 85 E D D 6 5 2 le L Appendices Factory Settings Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset Restoring the GS 10 to the settings made at the factory is referred to as Factory Reset Not only can you return all of the settings to the values in effect when the GS 10 was shipped from the factory you can also specify the range of settings to be reset 2 POWER 3 3 PATCF FT IALUE AUX IPUT OUTPUT 9 PARAMETER gt nt onor CJ CJ C O WRITE ETER SYSTEM CO CJ DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 4 UCI WWW G5 1 GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM with USB AUDIO INTERFACE ASSIGN SE ECT CJ CJ et w sEAZ PHONES GUITAR BASS w 1 Turn off the power 2 While holding down PREAMP SPEAKER CHANNEL SELECT A and B turn on the power The Factory Reset range setting screen appears in the display Factory Reset range To cancel Factory Reset press EXIT 3 Press PARAMETER lt B to move the cursor and ro
121. 100 0 Ach 0 100 Ach 00 Off 01 On Ach 00 Low 01 Middle 02 High Ach 00 OFF 01 ORIGINAL 02 1x8 03 1x10 04 1x12 05 1x15 06 1x18 07 2x12 08 2x15 09 4x10 OA 4x12 0B 8x10 0C 8x12 OD Customl OE Custom2 Ach 00 DYN57 01 DYN421 02 CND451 03 CND87 04 FLAT Ach 00 Off Mic 01 On Mic Ach 00 Center 01 1 02 2 03 3 04 4 05 5 06 6 07 7 08 8 09 9 0A 10 Ach 0 100 Ach 0 100 Bch Bch Bch Bch Bch Bch Bch Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk FX 2 ec 05 00 FE 05 01 05 02 05 03 05 04 05 05 05 06 05 07 05 08 FE 05 09 05 0A 05 OB 05 0C 05 OD 05 OE 05 OF 05 10 o05 11 05 12 05 13 05 14 05 15 05 16 FE 05 17 05 18 SE 05 19 05 1A 05 1B 05 LG 05 1D 05 lE 9 05 CP 05 20 E 05 21 05 22 05 23 05 24 ee 05 25 05 26 FR 05 27 05 28 05 29 05 2A 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0
122. 11 H THO ee RE 43 PA a EE E uU lei ei 48 INIPUEE SBEBG E 11 19 IN Cee 24 J Uns Lr basset 23 FACON O TEE 66 IS EE 46 PAIANIETE Xz EE 11 L Poi A 18 er pen EE 65 CODY casi Mm 25 EE E sri uiuit eau i SE 10 11 21 m Co erent eee ees 7 I CET 26 Level Mete e ee 67 RE e p DM C 27 E o EE 38 MR AO ERR 25 Line DONES cilea 16 Pato Nam E 18 Patch Extent 65 M Pleasant 54 M ces wl EE 54 Ile E TEE 24 53 METER illa 11 67 PATCH VALUE PET 11 MIGG AIN e ER 20 Pedal EE 45 58 NMIGINPRUI parlati 12 Pedal EE 36 58 Microphone ee 19 Pisa 42 MIDDLE aiar i 10 21 PHONES EE 11 DN RRE 68 82 Prone EE 44 Control 1 Out ie 70 Jd EN clits ca ARE RR ARI me PARE RO IR 15 cia Out iii 3 POWER RM 12 puce DR EE GE EEN 70 PREAMP ridire 21 Iob eet e KEE 70 PREAMP SPEAKER En 10 Om EC e EE 69 Preamp Speaker Simulator ses 28 Program heures 70 ERESBNGEB E 10 21 Receive Channel rina 69 Preset E e EE 18 Remote Cono EE 70 Program Change Map 73 DYING COCK MERCEDE 69 Eegeregie 69 HR ET CEET 12 Q MD OOT NOMEN RR 12 QUICK FX miei 11 22 60 IVI COMERCIO RETE 70 NU c n 64 H Reference Pitch ME 64 N Remot amp Contiols suse 75 NAME NS MASTER es 11 24 53 REVER meson niue o taa DES cM 11 21 Noise Suppressor iure 53 Revenge toten edem aera tet i eui bt 34 Ring Modulator egene 40 O OFF ai rin 47 CN 45 ODISSEA iti 10 21 S DI OL UIC
123. 127 11 0A 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 4 Source Act Range High 0 127 ASSIGN 5 12 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 5 0n Off 00 Off 01 On xx 12 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 ASSIGN 5 Target Refer to Table Target 12 02 01 7F 12 03 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 5 Target Min Target Param Min Data Target Param Max 12 04 XX XX 12 05 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 5 Target Max Target Param Min Data Target Param Max xx 12 067 XX XX 12 07 00 00 00 01 00 41 ASSIGN 5 Source Refer to Table Source xx x 2 08 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 5 Source Mode 00 Normal 01 Toggle 12 09 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 5 Source Act Range Low 0 127 12 0A 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 5 Source Act Range High 0 127 ASSIGN 6 13 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 6 0n Off 00 Off 01 On xx 13 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 ASSIGN 6 Target Refer to Table Target 13 02 01 7F 13 03 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 6 Target Min Target Param Min Data Target Param Max 13 04 XX XX 13 05 00 00 00 02 XX XX ASSIGN 6 Target Max Target Param Min Data Target Param Max xx 13 067 XX XX x 13 07 00 00 00 01 00 41 ASSIGN 6 Source Refer to Table Source xx Xxx 13 08 00 00 00 01 00 01 ASSIGN 6 Source Mode 00 Normal 01 Toggle 13 09 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 6 Source Act Range Low 0 127 13 0A 00 00 00 01 00 7F ASSIGN 6 Source
124. 3 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 Scale 28 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 Scale 29 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 Below is an explanation of the Description value when IN is C Replace each of the values when IN is something other than C 98 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch C VI Db D Y Eb Ab Bb Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Refer to Table HR Harmony Note Refer to Table HR Harmony Note Refer to Table HR Harmony Note Appendices Table AUTO RIFF lt AUTO RIFF User Phrase gt Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 03 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 32 User 1 C Stepl Refer to Table AR Step Note 03 0
125. 3_Mac pdf you will need the Adobe Acrobat Reader Either OMS or FreeMIDI must be installed in your Macintosh as appropriate for the sequencer software you are using 146 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh Disconnect the GS 10 from the Macintosh before you perform the installation If the power of the GS 10 is turned on a message like the following will appear when the Macintosh is started up Perform the steps described below as appropriate for the message that is displayed If the screen indicates Driver required for USB device unknown device is not available Search for driver on the Internet Click Cancel If the screen indicates Software required for using device unknown device cannot be found Please refer to the manual included with the device and install the necessary software Click Cancel Use the following procedure to install the GS 10 driver l Exit all currently running software applications If you are using a virus checker or similar software be sure to exit this as well 2 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Nore 3 Double click the GS 10 Driver E Installer icon found in the Driver E Mac OS We ii ers 9 8 of the CD ROM to start up the installer Location will differ depending on your system Make sure that the startup disk Ifa message like the following is displayed click Continue for the system you are usi
126. 6 Stepl Step2 Step3 Step4 Step5 Step6 Step7 Step8 Step9 Step10 Stepll Step12 Step13 Stepl4 Step15 Stepl6 Stepl 3 C Stepl 4 C Stepl 5 C Stepl 6 C Stepl 7 C Stepl 8 C Stepl 9 C Stepl 10 10 C B Stepl Stepl6 Refer to Table AR Step Note Refer to Table AR Step Note Refer to Table AR Step Note Refer to Table AR Step Note Refer to Table AR Step Note Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer to to to to to to to to to to Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR Step Step Step Step Step Step Step Step Step Step Note Note Note Note Note Note Note Note Note Note Appendices Table AR Step Note lt AUTO RIFF User Phrase Below is an explanation of the Description value when IN is C Replace each of the values when IN is something other than C 00 Pitch C 01 Pitch Db 02 Pitch D d 03 Pitch Eb 04 Pitch E 05 Pitch F 06 Pitch F 07 Pitch G 08 Pitch Ab 09 Pitch lt A OA Pitch Bb OB Pitch B 0c Pitch C OD Pitch Db OE Pitch D OF Pitch Eb 10 Pitch E 11 Pitch F 12 Pitch F 13 Pitch G 14 Pitch Ab 15 Pitch A 16 Pitch Bb 17 Pitch B 18 Pitch C 19 Pitch Db
127. 62 Troubleshooting 164 Problems when using the GS 10 164 Problems with the SOUNd 164 Other Proble espesa aan 165 Problems related to the USB driver 165 Problems when using the USB driver 167 Deleting the special driver 173 Index ec00000000000000000000000000000000000000000 174 8 Main Features True Tabletop Guitar Effects System This is an all new guitar effects system which gives you not only the kind of professional quality effects available only from BOSS but features a USB interface and built in monitor speakers as well Internal Effects Derived from the GT 6 GT 6B Made More Powerful All components of the GT 6 and GT 6B COSM amps and effects famous for their sonic quality and ease of use have been thoroughly improved in this system With its new amp types and effects the GS 10 takes you to a new dimension in sound creation The Functions You Want for Digital Recording The GS 10 not only gives you the recording capabilities you would expect with its DIGITAL OUT coaxial connector it also allows you to record simply and easily via USB What s more you can also record the direct sound while listening to the performance as it sounds with the effects added and add effects to sounds that have already been recorded Accepts Multiple Inputs You can
128. AMETER cae SPEAKE R O J CJ JUMP EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM CJ CJ O DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 2 3 4 NAME NS C WWW EQ MASTER 5 10 GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM INPUT Ga with USB AUDIO INTERFACE P N SELECT 1 IST DEL CAPS e TONE MOI ADV COMP FLANGI PAN s i HARM VIBRATO ui e PITCH e UNIV OCTAVE ROTARY PEDALBEND SHORTDELAY 3 Ap SSS GUITAR BASS w 1 Press the ON OFF button for the effect you want to be able to switch on and off The settings for the selected effect appear in the display With FX 1 and FX 2 the settings for the currently selected effect are shown 2 Press the ON OFF button again to switch the effect on or off The effect name flashes in the display when that effect is disabled 3 To select another effect to be switched on and off repeat Steps 1 and 2 4 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen fyou want to save a tone with the settings you ve made use the Write procedure p 25 to save the tone to a User patch Setting the Effects Simply QUICK FX Each effect includes prepared sample settings called Quick Settings You can easily create new effect sounds just by selecting and combining these Quick Settings PATCF IALUE AUX INPUT OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL a PARAMETER USB CJ ii L JUMP EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM CJ C O DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 2 3 4 C LCE MN M mm O CJ G IQ um EST system PHASER lt 2 CHO
129. ATCH 1 4 and then press these buttons to call up the corresponding patches directly GAIN BASS gde SERIE PRESENCE LEVEL i T icu METER SYSTEM C qJ DIRECT PATC TUNER 1 2 3 4 O EON NU C C 5 10 GUITAR EFFECTS STEM SET sigg CHORUS 2099 pea wesen JE Ki with USB AUDIO IN ERFACE miekt E 3 ai NI SHORT DELAY STEREO EQ INS DEL CAPS PHONES GUITAR BASS v 4 1 1 Press SYSTEM a number of times until DIRECT PATCH is displayed 2 Press PARAMETER lt B to select the number of the DIRECT PATCH button to which you want to register the patch 3 Use the PATCH VALUE dial to select the patch you want to register 4 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen You can also register patches by selecting the patch in the Play screen then pressing one of the DIRECT PATCH 1 4 buttons after pressing the WRITE button In this case the patch appearing in the display is registered When a patch is registered using this method the current settings are also saved along with the patch when it s registered If you want to register only the patch use the regular registration method Copying the PREAMP SPEAKER Settings to Another Channel You can take the PREAMP SPEAKER settings for one channel and copy them to another channel 1 3 PREAMP SPEAKER PATCH VALUE ei AE QUTPUT GAIN BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL a PARAMETER gt gt
130. ATI i AP minimum value _ Sins mmm nn B mmm Bm Hm m mmm m mm am s mam A Target Min 0 40 80 127 This determines whether the control pedal will function as a PS SS momentary type switch such as the optional FS 5U Normal On The normal state is Off minimum value with the switch On maximum value only while the foot switch is depressed On Toggle The setting is toggled On maximum value or Off minimum value with each press of the foot switch Setthis to Normal when a latch type foot switch such as 0 T 40 60 z 127 E t the optional FS 5L is connected or when selecting somethin cenang center GT p amp amp value other than a foot switch as the controller When using a foot switch or other on off switching controller as the source leave these at Lo 0 and Hi 127 With certain settings the value may not change 63 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions and System Settings Tuning the Guitar When the Tuner is turned on sounds input to the GS 10 are output directly as is bypassed and the tuner is activated Under these conditions you can then tune your guitar Turning the Tuner Function On PATCH VALUE ae is ot A cO O 4 PARAMETER SPRAKE R CJ CJ C O DIRECT PATCH TUNER m O ARC Each time TUNER is pressed the Tuner is switched on or off The TUNER button s indicator lights when the function is on About the Display During Tuning With the G
131. AUBPUWAWNAHLNE Appendices Table ENH Frequency lt ENH Frequency gt Blues OD Turbo OD Booster OD 1 T Scream Natural OD Bass OD Distortion RAT GUV DS Mild DS Solid DS DST Metal Zone R MAN Heavy Metal Loud Sharp Mechanical 60s FUZZ Oct FUZZ MUFF FUZZ Customl Custom2 Custom3 Quick Fx Patch PRE SP Type JC 120 Jazz Combo Full Range Warm Clean Clean TWIN Pro Crunch Tweed Crunch Blues Wild Crunch VO Drive VO Lead MATCH Drive Fat MATCH BG Lead BG Drive BG Rhythm Smooth Drive MS1959 I MS1959 II MS1959 I II MS HiGain Power Stack R FIER Red R FIER Orng R FIER Vint T Amp Clean T Amp Crunch T Amp Lead SLDN Drive Stack Lead Stack 5150 Drive Metal Stack Metal Lead CONCERT 810 SESSION BASS 360 T E B MAN FLIP TOP Bass Clean Bass Crunch Bass HiGain Mic Preamp Customl Custom2 Custom3 117 E Oo D 5 2 le rn Appendices Table EQ Middle Frequency EQ SEQ Lo Hi Mid f gt Table HR Harmony HR HR1 HR2 Harm Data H Description Data H Description 00 20 0Hz 00 2oct 01 25 0Hz 01 14th 02 31 5Hz 02 13th 03 40 0Hz 03 12th 04 50 0Hz 04 llth 05 63 0Hz 05 10th 06 80 0Hz 06 9th 07 100Hz 07 loct 08 125Hz 08 7th 09 160Hz 09 6th 0A 200Hz 0A 5th 0B 250Hz 0B 4th 0C 315Hz 0C 3rd OD 400Hz OD 2nd OE 500Hz OE Unison OF 630Hz OF 2nd 10 800Hz 10 3rd 11 1 00kHz 11 4th 12 1 25kHz 12 5th 13 1 60kHz 13 6th 14 2 00k
132. Audio Digital Performer Metro or SPARK LE 3 Open the Audio setting dialog box of your ASIO compatible software and select GS 10 ASIO 16bit as the ASIO Device 154 MEM ASIO Steinberg Audio Stream In Out Interface This is an audio interface standard promoted by the Steinberg Corporation When the GS 10 is used with ASIO compatible software the synchronization precision will be improved allowing a more sophisticated music production environment MEM The Audio setting dialog box will be named differently depending on your software For details refer to the manual of your software Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh B MacOSX users l With the GS 10 disconnected start up Mac OS Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse if used 2 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 3 Double click the GS10USBDriver icon found in the Driver Mac OS X of the CD ROM In case of Mac OS X v10 1 5 the display will indicate Authorization then click on the key symbol wn GS10USBDriver 4 The Authenticate dialog box will appear type your password and click OK The display will indicate Welcome to the GS 10 USB Driver Installer e Install BOSS GS 10 USB Driver Welcome to the BOSS GS 10 USB Driver Installer Introduction This is a driver for using the GS 10 on Mac OS X All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or r
133. BPM A Depth 0 100 Level 0 100 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Mode Selection for the wah mode LPF Low Pass Filter This creates a wah effect over a wide frequency range BPF Band Pass Filter This creates a wah effect in a narrow frequency range Polarity Selection for the direction in which the filter will change in response to the input Up The frequency of the filter will rise Down The frequency of the filter will fall Sens Sensitivity This adjusts the sensitivity at which the filter will change in the direction determined by the polarity setting Higher values will result in a stronger response With a setting of 0 the strength of picking will have no effect Frequency This adjusts the center frequency of the Wah effect Peak Adjusts the way in which the wah effect applies to the area around the center frequency Lower values will produce a wah effect over a wide area around the center frequency Higher values will produce a wah effect in a narrow area around the center frequency With a value of 50 a standard wah sound will be produced Rate Adjusts the frequency of the auto wah When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the
134. BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Depth Adjusts the depth of the auto wah effect Level Adjusts the volume TM Tone Modify This changes the characteristics of the connected guitar Parameter Value Type Fat Presence Mild Tight Enhance S H Hi S H HF S Hollow H Hollow S AC H AC P AC Low 50 4 50 High 50 4 50 Level 0 100 Type This selects the type of tone modification Presence Bright tone with boosted high mid range Enhance Tone with the high frequencies boosted Changes from a single coil pickup tone to a humbucking pickup tone Changes from a humbucking pickup tone to a mixed tone of two single coil pickups Changes from a humbucking pickup tone to a single coil pickup half tone Changes a single coil pickup tone to a full S Hollow acoustic tone with the body resonance add ed Changes a humbucking pickup tone to a H Hollow full acoustic tone with the body resonance added Changes a single coil pickup tone to an acoustic guitar tone Changes a humbucking pickup tone to an acoustic guitar tone Changes a piezo pickup tone to an acoustic guitar tone Low Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range High Adjusts the tone for the High frequency range Level Adjusts the volume 37 Chapter 4 Int
135. C Direct Level 00 00 00 02 00 64 PB Pdl Position 00 00 00 02 00 64 2CE Low Depth 00 00 00 02 00 64 PAN Depth 00 00 00 02 00 01 VB Trigger Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 64 UV Level 00 00 00 02 00 64 RT Rate Fast Refer to Table Rate 00 00 00 02 00 64 SDD Feedback 00 00 00 02 00 04 HU Vowel 2 Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 64 SL Trigger Sensitivity 00 00 00 02 00 71 AR Tempo Refer to Table Rate 00 00 00 02 00 01 SYN Chromatic Refer to Table Patch BS 00 00 00 02 00 05 SEQ Low Middle Q Refer to Table EQ Middle O 05 08 00 00 00 02 00 64 PH Manual 00 00 00 02 00 64 FL Resonance HR HR1 Pre Delay LSB 00 00 00 02 00 64 PS PS1 Fine OC 00 00 00 02 00 64 PB Effect Level E 00 00 00 02 00 50 2CE Low Pre Delay Refer to Table Patch 5 PAN 00 00 00 02 00 64 VB Rise Time p UV 00 00 00 02 00 64 RT Rise Time gt 00 00 00 02 00 78 SDD Effect Level Da 00 00 00 02 00 64 HU Sensitivity e SL ul L 105 Appendices xx ek 05 OA 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 fi 05 HE 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 xx x 05 OE 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 xx xx 05 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 12 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 14 00 00 00 00 106 00 00 00 00 00
136. CE MESSAGE Control Change Status Second Third BnH ccH vvH n MIDI Channel Number cc Controller Number 0H FH ch 1 ch 16 00H 20H 0 32 01H 1FH 1 31 21H 5FH 33 95 vv Value 00H 7FH 0 127 f you set up a system parameter MIDI PC Out for On Bank Select 00H 20H is transmitted when switching patch If you set up a control change number at a system parameter MIDI EXP Out control change information is transmitted when operating an external EXP pedal If you set up a control change number at a system parameter MIDI CTL 1 Out control change information is transmitted when operating an external CTL pedal If you set up a control change number at a system parameter MIDI CTL 2 Out control change information is transmitted when operating an external CTL pedal Program Change Status Second CnH ppH n MIDI Channel Number pp Program Number OH FH ch 1 ch 16 00H 7FH No 1 No 128 If you set up a system parameter MIDI PC Out for On program change information is transmitted when switching patch ESYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE eStart Status FAH Stop Status FCH BSYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE Status Data Byte Status FOH iiH ddH eeH F7H FOH System Exclusive ii Manufacturer ID 41H Roland dd ee Data 00H 7FH 0 127 F7H EOX End of Exclusive System common For more details please refer to Rola
137. Check sum End of exclusive A DT1 message is capable of providing only the valid data among those specified by an RQ1 message Some models are subject to limitations in data format used for a single transaction Requested data for example may have a limit in length or must be divided into predetermined address fields before it is exchanged across the interface The number of bytes comprising address data varies from one Model ID to another The error checking process uses a checksum that provides a bit pattern where the last 7 bits are zero when values for an address size and that checksum are summed Example of Message Transactions Device A sending data to Device B Transfer of a DT1 message is all that takes place Data set 1 _ _ gt More than 20m sec time interval Data set cf Data set 1 cb e Device B requesting data from Device A Device B sends an RO1 message to Device A Checking the message Device A sends a DT1 message back to Device B E Request data Data set 1 More than 20m sec time interval Data set 1 ec Data set Il cf Appendices MIDI Implementation Model GS 10 Date Jul 15 2003 Version 1 00 1 RECOGNIZED RECEIVE DATA BCHANNEL VOICE MESSAGE e Control Change Status Second Third BnH ccH VVH n MIDI Channel Number cc Controller Number OH FH ch 1 ch 16 00H 20H 0 32 01H 1FH 1 3
138. DI device connected to the GS 10 as follows Click the device name and you will be able to edit it Device 1 GS 10 MIDI IN OUT Device 2 GS 10 CONTROL O FreeMIDI Configuration HIE B Free 10 CONTROL SH 10 MIDI IN OUT GS GES T 10 Port B Let La La 12 From the File menu select Save and save your settings 13 Verify that MIDI transmission and reception occur correctly From the MIDI menu choose Check Connections 152 yon If a MIDI sound module is connected to the GS 10 the following step will cause a relatively loud sound to be produced by the sound module so it is a good idea to turn down the volume on the sound module first 14 15 16 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh If a MIDI sound module is connected to the GS 10 s MIDI OUT connector click the GS 10 MIDI IN OUT icon in the setting window If you hear sound the settings have been made correctly FreeMIDI Configuration MANUFACTURER Mm H GS 10 CONTROL EH GS 10 GS 10 Port Les GS 10 MIDI IN OUT corresponds to the GS 10 s MIDI IN MIDI OUT GS 10 CONTROL corresponds to the GS 10 s control port After you have verified this and exit FreeMIDI Setup Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software For details on settings refer to the manual that came with your software gt Next you need to install the ASIO driver p 154 153 Instal
139. Di 1 00H For values of 01H or lower the Program Change Map will be switched according to the value For values of 02H or higher the received data will be ignored 20H The received data will be ignored regardless of the value 2 Rcognizes messages designated by specifying this as a source for Assign p 60 Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 122 Appendices Specifications GS 10 Guitar Effects System with USB Audio Interface Rated Power Output 15W 1 5W Signal Processing AD Conversion 24 bit AF method DA Conversion 24 bit Digital Out USB Audio 24 bit Sampling Frequency 44 1 kHz Program Memories 200 100 User 100 Preset Nominal Input Level GUITAR BASS INPUT 10 dBu MIC INPUT 40 dBu BALANCE AUX INPUT L R 10 dBu Input Impedance GUITAR BASS INPUT 1 MQ MIC INPUT 2 2 kQ AUX INPUT L R 33 kQ Nominal Output Level OUTPUT L R 10 dBu GUITAR AMP OUT 10 dBu Output Impedance OUTPUT L R 1 kQ GUITAR AMP OUT 1 5 kQ Speaker Internal Speaker x 2 Digital Output EIAJ CP1201 S P DIF USB AUDIO IN OUT Stereo 44 1 kHz 24 bit Capable of simultaneous recording and playback MIDI Control IN OUT MIDI IN OUT Display 16 characters 2 lines backlit LCD Connectors GUITAR BASS input jack PHONES jack MIC INPUT jack TRS balanced 1 4 inch phone type MIC INPUT connector XLR balanced AUX
140. Does the buzz decrease when you lower the volume of your guitar Ifthe buzz decreases when you lower the volume of your guitar it is possible that the pickup of your guitar is receiving noise from a computer or a display screen Move as far away from the computer as possible Sometimes this problem can be solved by grounding the chassis of your computer or the grounding connector of your computer s AC power supply You should also check whether there is a device nearby that produces a strong magnetic field such as a television or a microwave oven p 4 172 Troubleshooting Deleting the special driver If you were unable to install the special driver according to the procedure given the GS 10 may not be recognized correctly by the computer In this case use the following procedure to delete the special driver and then follow the procedure in Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows p 126 Macintosh p 146 to install the driver once again Windows XP 2000 users In order to delete uninstall the driver a user with administrative privileges such as Administrator must be logged onto Windows For details contact the system administrator of your computer Start Windows with all USB cables disconnected except the keyboard and mouse P Log on to Windows as one of the following users e auser whose account type is Computer Administrator e the Administrator or other user with the privileges of the
141. ETAL 1 06 METAL 2 07 FUZZ 03 04 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 0A Customl Bottom 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 OA 50 03 04 00 02 00 00 00 01 00 OA Customl Top 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 OA 50 03 04 00 03 00 00 00 01 00 OA Customl Low 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 OA 50 03 04 00 04 00 00 00 01 00 OA Customl High 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 OA 50 03 04 01 00 00 00 00 01 00 07 Custom2 Type 03 04 01 01 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Bottom 03 04 01 02 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Top 03 04 01 03 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Low 03 04 01 04 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 High 03 04 02 00 00 00 00 01 00 07 Custom3 Type 03 04 02 01 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Bottom 03 04 02 02 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Top 03 04 02 03 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Low 03 04 02 04 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 High Table WAH WAH Customize Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 03 05 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 04 Customl Type 00 CRY WAH 01 VO WAH 02 Fat WAH 03 Light WAH 04 7String WAH 03 05 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 0A Customl OQ 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 OA 50 03 05 00 02 00 00 00 O1 00 OA Customl Range Low 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 OA 50 03 05 00 03 00 00 00 O1 00 OA Customl Range High 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 OA 50 03 05 00 04 00 00 00 01 00 0A Customl Presence 00 50 01 40 02 30 09 40 OA 50 03 05 01 00 00 00 00 01 00 04 Custom2 Type 03 05 01 01 00 00 00 01 00
142. GN 2 Press PARAMETER a B to select one of the Assigns from Assign 1 8 3 Press ASSIGNI to set the selected Assign to On Each time ASSIGN is pressed it alternately switches this on and off ASSIGN flashes in the display when the Assign is switched off Always set any Assign to Off when it is not being used 4 Press QUICK FX The Preset settings selection screen appears in the display The following appears when the Quick Settings are changed through editing of parameters immediately after the patches are changed d Turn the PATCH VALUE dial to select the Preset settings 6 Touse the Quick Settings with other Assigns repeat Steps 2 5 Even when using this procedure the settings selected in Step 5 are maintained as is and carried over to the Quick Settings for the next effect 7 To save the settings use the Write procedure p 25 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Preset Settings Por PEDAL WAH The expression pedal functions as a wah pedal PEDAL BEND The expression pedal is used for pedal bend Pos FOOT VOLUME The expression pedal functions as a volume pedal The compressor is switched on Pos SOMPORORE and off with the foot switch The overdrive distortion is OD DS ON OFF switched on and off with the foot switch The delay is switched on and off BEER with the foot switch The chorus is switched on and off oe eros cone with the foot switch Pos FX 1 ON OFF FX
143. H bbH ccH ddH eeH ffH sum F7H FOH Exclusive Status 41H Manufacturer ID Roland dev Device ID dev 00H 1FH 00H Model ID MSB GS 10 63H Model ID LSB GS 10 12H Command ID DT1 aaH Address MSB bbH Address ccH Address ddH Address LSB eeH Data ffH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX End of System Exclusive When transmitting large amounts of data spanning fragmented addresses the data can be transmitted only to those addresses that are contiguous einquiry Message Oldentity Request FOH 7EH 10H 06H 01H F7H FOH Exclusive Status 7EH ID Number 10H Device ID 06H Sub ID 1 01H Sub ID 2 F7H EOX End of System Exclusive The 7FH Broadcast device ID is also supported When an Identity Request is received the GS 10 will transmitted the following Identity Reply Oldentity Reply FOH 7EH 10H 06H 02H 41H 63H 01H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H F7H FOH Exclusive Status 7EH ID Number Universal Non realtime Message 10H Device ID 06H Sub ID 1 02H Sub ID 2 41H ID Number Roland 63H 01H Device Family Code 00H 00H Device Family Number Code 00H 00H 00H 00H Software Revision Level F7H EOX End of System Exclusive When an Identity Request is received the GS 10 will transmitted the following Identity Reply 4 PARAMETER ADDRESS MAP The address and size are displayed under 7 bit hexadecimal notation Address MSB LSB Binary 0aaa aaaa Obbb bbbb Occc
144. HU Level 0 100 05 5A 00 00 00 01 00 13 SL Pattern 00 Pl 13 P20 05 5B 00 00 00 01 00 71 SL Rate Refer to Table Rate 05 5C 00 00 00 01 00 64 SL Trigger Sensitivity 0 100 05 5D 00 00 00 01 00 27 AR Phrase Presetl Preset30 Userl Userl0 05 5E 00 00 00 01 00 01 AR Loop 00 Off 01 On 05 5F 00 00 00 01 00 71 AR Tempo Refer to Table Rate 05 60 00 00 00 01 00 64 AR Sensitivity 0 100 05 61 00 00 00 01 00 OB AR Key C Am B G m Phrase Preset1 30 05 62 00 00 00 01 00 64 AR Attack 0 100 05 63 00 00 00 01 00 01 AR Hold 00 2 Off 01 On 05 64 00 00 00 01 00 64 AR Effect Level 0 100 05 65 00 00 00 01 00 64 AR Direct Level 0 100 05 66 00 00 00 01 00 64 SYN Sensitivity 0 100 05 67 00 00 00 01 00 03 SYN Wave 00 Square 01 Saw 02 Brass 03 Bow 05 68 00 00 00 01 00 01 SYN Chromatic 00 Off Wave Square Saw 01 On 05 69 00 00 00 01 00 02 SYN Octave Shift 00 0 Wave Square Saw 01 1 02 2 05 6A 00 00 00 01 00 64 SYN PWM Rate 0 100 Wave Square 05 6B 00 00 00 01 00 64 SYN PWM Depth 0 100 Wave Square 05 6C 00 00 00 01 00 64 SYN Cutoff Frequency 0 100 05 6D 00 00 00 01 00 64 SYN Resonance 0 100 05 6E 00 00 00 01 00 64 SYN FLT Sensitivity 0 100 05 6F 00 00 00 01 00 64 SYN FLT Decay 0 100 05 70 00 00 00 01 00 64
145. High Pre Delay Adjust the time from when the high frequency range direct sound is output until the effect sound is output Extending the pre delay will produce the sensation of multiple sounds doubling effect Hi Level High Level Adjust the volume of the high frequency range PAN With the volume level of the left and right sides alternately changing when playing sound in stereo you can get an effect that makes the guitar sound appear to fly back and forth between the speakers Parameter Value Wave Shape 0 100 Hate 0 100 BPM BPM A Depth 0 100 Wave Shape This adjusts changes in volume level Rate Adjusts the frequency speed of the change When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes tt easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Depth Adjusts the depth of the effect VB Vibrato This effect creates vibrato by slightly modulating the pitch Parameter Value Rate 0 100 BPM BPM A Depth 0 100 Trigger Off On Hise Time 0 100 Rate This adjusts the rate of the vibrato When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM
146. Hz 14 7th 15 2 50kHz 15 loct 16 3 15kHz 16 9th 17 4 00kHz 17 10th 18 5 00kHz 18 11th 19 6 30kHz 19 12th 1A 8 00kHz 1A 13th 1B 10 0kHz 1B 14th LC 2oct 1D Scale 1 Refer to Table HR Scale 1E Scale 2 1F Scale 3 20 Scale 4 Table EQ Middle Q EQ Lo Hi Mid Q gt 21 Scale 5 22 Scale 6 22 2 23 Scale 7 Data H Description 24 Scale 8 2 2 2 2 2 25 Scale 9 00 0 5 26 Scale 10 01 1 27 Scale 11 02 2 28 Scale 12 03 4 29 Scale 13 04 8 2A Scale 14 05 16 2B Scale 15 2C Scale 16 2D Scale 17 2E Scale 18 2F Scale 19 30 Scale 20 31 Scale 21 Table Pre Delay lt Pre Delay gt 21 3321 2 2 2 2 33 Scale 23 Data H Description 34 Scale 24 2 2 2 2 35 Scale 25 00 00 Oms 36 Scale 26 00 01 lms 37 Scale 27 38 Scale 28 00 7F 127ms 39 Scale 29 01 00 128ms 01 7F 255ms 02 00 256ms 02 2C 300ms 02 2D Sixteenth note 02 2E eighth note triplet 02 2F doted sixteenth note 02 30 eighth note 02 31 quarter note triplet 02 32 doted eighth note 02 33 quarter note Table Step Rate PH Step Rate Data H Description 00 OFF 01 0 65 100 66 whole note 67 doted half note 68 whole note triplet 69 half note 6A doted quarter note 6B half note triplet 6c quarter note 6D doted eighth note 6E quarter note triplet 6F eighth note 70 doted sixteenth note 71 eighth note triplet 72 sixteent
147. INPUT jack L R RCA Phono type OUTPUT jack L R RCA Phono type GUITAR AMP OUT jack EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 jack DIGITAL OUT connector Coaxial USB connector MIDI connector IN OUT AC Adaptor jack Control PREAMP SPEAKER GAIN knob BASS knob MIDDLE knob TREBLE knob PRESENCE knob LEVEL knob On Off button CHANNEL SELECT button A B C COMP SUSTAIN knob On Off button OD DS DRIVE knob LEVEL knob On Off button DELAY FEEDBACK knob LEVEL knob On Off button TAP button CHORUS LEVEL knob On Off button REVERB LEVEL knob On Off button 123 gt Oo D 5 2 le rn Appendices FX 1 button FX 2 button EO button NAME NS MASTER button ASSIGN button INPUT SELECT button QUICK FX button PARAMETER button L R EXIT button WRITE button TUNER button USB button SPEAKER ON OFF button METER button SYSTEM button DIRECT PATCH button 1 4 AUX INPUT LEVEL knob OUTPUT LEVEL knob PATCH VALUE dial Power Supply AC 14 V Supply AC adaptor BOSS BRC series Current Draw 800 mA Dimensions 329 W x 231 D x 85 H mm 13 W x 9 1 8 D x 3 3 8 H inches Weight 2 25 kg 5 Ibs Accessories AC Adaptor BRC series Read This First Leaflet Owner s Manual USB cable GS 10 Software CD ROM Cakewalk Music Creator set CD ROM Owner s Manual Options Expression Pedal EV 5 Roland Foot Switch FS 5U Connection Cord PCS 31 Roland 1 4 inches Phone Plug stereo
148. Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 User Phrase User 1 10 IN C B STEP 1 16 OUT C B 2 octave end Phrase Select the phrase User programmed phrases are used when User 1 10 is selected Loop If Loop is turned On the phrase will be played back continuously Tempo Adjust the speed of the phrase When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER B to display the Master BPM settings screen Sens Sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity of triggering With low settings of this parameter softly picked notes will not retrigger the phrase De the phrase will continue playing but strongly picked notes will retrigger the phrase so that it will playback from the beginning With high settings of this parameter the phrase will be retriggered even by softly picked notes No retriggering occurs when the value is set to 0 49 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Key Select the key of the song that you wish to play Attack Adjust the strength of the attack By adding an attack to each note of the phrase you can produce a sensation as though the notes were being picked Hold I
149. M when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Effect Level This adjusts the volume of the phaser Direct Level This adjusts the volume of the direct sound FL Flanger The flanging effect gives a twisting jet airplane like character to the sound Parameter Value Rate 0 100 BPM BPM A Depth 0 100 Manual 0 100 Hesonance 0 100 Separation 0 100 Low Cut Flat 55 0 Hz 800 Hz Effect Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 Rate This sets the rate of the flanging effect When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER Be to display the Master BPM settings screen Depth Determines the depth of the flanging effect Manual Adjusts the center frequency at which to apply the effect Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Resonance Determines the amount of resonance feedback Increasing the value will emphasize the effect creating a more unusual sound Separation Adjusts the diffusion The diffusion increases as the value increases Low Cut Low Cut Filter This sets the frequency at wh
150. METER lt B so that CTL 1 Func or CTL 2 Func is displayed 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen the foot switch is pressed 2 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to set the foot switch function Assign 1 8 The controller set in each patch s Assign p 60 is used Tuner On Off The foot switch is used as a tuner On Off switch Use a momentary type foot switch such as the optional FS 5U Remote Strt Stop Used as a foot switch for use in starting and stopping a computer or a recorder sequencer or other MIDI connected device For more on the settings for the device being run refer to Controlling Recorders and Sequencers Remotely from the GS 10 Remote Control p 75 Chapter 6 Setting the External Pedal Functions Setting the External Pedal Function for Individual Patches Assign There are two ways to set the assignments Quick Settings which allows you to use OUICK FX to complete the settings quickly and easily and Manual Settings where each parameter is set one at a time Quick Settings When you use QUICK FX to select prepared settings Preset settings the relevant parameters are then instantly set to their optimal values This lets you finish making the settings simply instead of setting each individual parameter separately DIRECT PATCH mi mai TN GS 10 GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM with USB AUDIO INTERFACE COELI ITAR B 1 Press ASSI
151. Master BPM settings screen DlyTime F Delay Time Fine Make fine adjustments to the delay time Tap Time Adjusts the delay time of the right channel delay This setting adjusts the R channel delay time relative to the L channel delay time considered as 100 Feedback Feedback is returning a delay signal to the input This parameter determines the amount of feedback A higher value will increase the number of the delay repeats High Cut High Cut Filter This sets the frequency at which the high cut filter begins to take effect This allows you to get a mild effect sound by cutting the high end component above the set frequency When it is set to Flat the high cut filter is off or has no effect Effect Level This adjusts the volume of the delay sound ven After TAP is pressed several times the interval between presses of the button is then used as the delay time setting You can change the Master BPM by setting the delay time to the BPM and pressing TAP several times 33 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters CHORUS In this effect a slightly detuned sound is added to the original sound to add depth and breadth Parameter Value On Off Off On Mode Mono Stereo1 Stereo2 Rate 0 100 BPM BPM A Depth 0 100 Pre Delay 0 0 msec 40 0 msec Low Cut Flat 55 Hz 800 Hz High Cut 700 Hz 11 0 kHz Flat Effect Level 0 100 On Off Effect On Off Turns the CHOR
152. Mic Dis Mic Pos Mic Level Direct Level O The settings may be changed but they have no effect 83 E Oo D 5 Le o L Appendices Patch List No Patch Name OD DS Ch Select ch A ch B ch C P101 POWER LEAD A MS1959 I Drive Stack Metal Lead P102 WARM CLEAN A Warm Clean Warm Clean JC 120 P103 BRIT VALVES A VO Drive MS1959 1 MS HiGain P104 METAL MASTERS A T Amp Lead R FIER Red 5150 Drive P105 ATTIC AMPS A Pro Crunch Clean TWIN VO Lead P106 WARM OVERDRIVE T Scream A Fat MATCH Crunch VO Drive P107 1969 VIBE 60s FUZZ A MS1959 1 MS1959 1 Power Stack P108 CLASSICAL ROCK T Scream A Pro Crunch MS1959 I MS HiGain P109 5th TONE SIWGEAR A Warm Clean JC 120 SLDN P110 CRYING GUV DS A MS1959 1 MS1959 II MS HiGain P111 70 s FUNK A Clean TWIN Clean TWIN Clean TWIN P112 ALMOST HUMAN A Clean TWIN Crunch BG Lead P113 80 s ROCKABILLY A Warm Clean Pro Crunch Drive Stack P114 H amp K TRIPLE A T Amp Clean T Amp Crunch T Amp Lead P115 TEXAS TREM Blues OD A Warm Clean Clean TWIN Pro Crunch P116 JAZZ CATS B Jazz Combo Pro Crunch SLDN P117 DRIVIN BG A BG Rhythm BG Drive R FIER Orng P118 BIGGEST MUFF MUFF FUZZ A JC 120 Full Range Pro Crunch P119 CLEAN DRIVE Turbo OD A Warm Clean MATCH Drive Smooth Drive P120 SOLID STACK Booster A Power Stack Power Stack Power S
153. N Refer SDD HU Manual SL AR Hold SYN Cutoff Frequency BS SEQ High Middle EQ Refer PH Direct Level FL Direct Level HR HR2 Pre Delay Refer PS PS1 Level OC PB 2CE High Pre Delay PAN Refer HU Level SL AR Effect Level SYN Resonance BS SEQ High EQ HR HR2 HR2 Pre Delay LSB PS PS2 Mode Refer PAN AR Direct Level SYN FLT Sensitivity BS SO Level Level Pitch uml uo INN to Table Patch to Table Pre Delay to Table Rate to Table Patch Refer to Table EQ Middle Frequency to Table Step Rate to Table Low Cut to Table Rate to Table EQ Middle 0 to Table HR Harmony to Table Patch to Table Pre Delay to Table Patch to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 05 16 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 02 05 18 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 02 05 1A 00 00 00 02 kk 05 1C 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 02 Kk kk 05 1E 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 02 05 20 00 64 00 OB 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 00 02 33 00 65 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 64 00 01 SYN FLT Decay BS SEQ NK Fine IUNI NO Uu Jg Jg I I I Refer to Table Patch SYN FLT Depth Refer to Table Patch BS SEQ HR Direct Level PS PS2 Pre Delay SYN Attack di e I I I PS PS2 Pre Delay LSB di e I I
154. PS1 Pitch PS PS1 Fine PS PS1 Pre Delay PS PS1 Feedback PS PS1 Level PS PS2 Mode PS PS2 Pitch PS PS2 Fine PS PS2 Pre Delay PS PS2 Level PS Direct Level OC Range OC Octave Level OC Direct Level PB Pitch Min PB Pitch Max PB Pdl Position PB Effect Level PB Direct Level 2CE Xover Frequency 2CE Low Rate 2CE Low Depth 2CE Low Pre Delay 2CE Low Level 2CE High Rate 2CE High Depth 2CE High Pre Delay 2CE High Level PAN Wave Shape PAN Rate PAN Depth VB Rate VB Depth VB Trigger VB Rise Time UV Rate UV Depth UV Level RT Speed Select RT Rate Slow RT Rate Fast RT Rise Time RT Fall Time RT Depth SDD Delay Time SDD Feedback SDD Effect Level HU Mode HU Vowel 1 HU Vowel 2 HU Sensitivity HU Rate HU Depth HU Manual HU Level SL Pattern SL Rate SL Trigger Sensitivity AR Phrase AR Loop AR Tempo AR Sensitivity AR Key AR Attack AR Hold AR Effect Level AR Direct Level SYN Sensitivity SYN Wave SYN Chromatic SYN Octave Shift SYN PWM Rate SYN PWM Depth SYN Cutoff Frequency SYN Resonance SYN FLT Sensitivity SYN FLT Decay SYN FLT Depth SYN Attack SYN Release SYN Velocity SYN Hold SYN Synth Level SYN Direct Level BS Character BS Level SEO Low EQ SEQ Low Middle Frequency SEQ Low Middle Q SEQ Low Middle EQ SEQ High Middle Frequency SEQ High Middle Q SEQ High Middle EQ SEQ High EQ SEQ Level DD On Off DD Type DD Dly
155. Patch Name Input Select Effects Assign 1 8 e Master Noise Suppressor Effect Chain User Patches Preset Patches User Patches U001 U100 Newly created effects settings are saved in the User patches A U appears in the display when a User patch is being used Preset Patches P101 P200 The Preset patches contain effect settings that really help bring out the special characteristics of the GS 10 Although you cannot overwrite the Preset patches with your own settings you can change edit a Preset patch s settings then save the result as a User patch p 25 44 II A p appears in the display when a Preset patch is being used How to Select Patches Patch Change When the Play screen is showing in the display you can switch patches using the PATCH VALUE dial or DIRECT PATCH 1 4 p 27 PATCH VALUE AUX INPUT OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL 9 4 PARAMETER gt e RA G O L JUMP O oO DIRECT PATCH 1 2 3 4 w a a en TUNER L Tf you want to set a limit to the number of patches that can be selected with the PATCH VALUE dial change the system function settings p 65 Settings currently being edited are cleared when you switch patches If you want to save the setting changes you ve made use the Write procedure p 25 About the Display Indication The following information appears in the Play screen Patch Name User Preset Number If the P
156. Quick Setup dialog box will appear About Quick Setup Use Quick Setup to make changes to your FreeMIDI Configuration document easily Certain MIDI devices can be detected automatically if the device s MIDI In and MIDI i Out jacks are both connected to an interface To use this feature make sure your i devices and interfaces are turned on and click the Auto Config button below i Please note that Auto Config may not be able to detect every device in your studio i Click Continue to begin Quick Setup If the dialog will not appear select Quick Setup from the Configuration menu 7 Click Continue If the dialog box does not show GS 10 Driver check whether the GS 10 is connected correctly and start up FreeMIDI Setup once again 8 Inthe dialog box that appears set Studio Location to GS 10 GS 10 Port For the Cable field located below it choose Cable 1 and click gt gt Add gt gt New Device Current Configuration Manufacturer GS 10 GS 10 Port Model Studio Location GS 10 GS 10Port w Cable i This is the Quick Setup dialog To add a i device setup its information above and iclick Add Click on any item to display i its information here i Remove 9 Repeat step 8 up to Cable 2 10 when settings are complete click Done A setting window will appear 11 In the setting window change the device name indicating the MI
157. RUS Mag os p Au SU Ga with USB AUDIO INTERFACE O gt 1 E ibi BEND eSHORTDELAY es EQ DEL CAPS PEDAL ML GUITAR BASS ww 1 Press QUICK FX The effects selection screen appears in the display Performing Step 1 while editing an effect takes you to the status following Step 2 2 Press the ON OFF button for the effect you want to select for Quick Settings The name of the effect being set with Quick Settings appears in the upper row of the display and the Quick Settings Name currently selected for that effect appears in the lower row of the display The following appears in the display immediately after patches are changed or when the settings in Quick settings are changed by editing the parameters The upper row of the display flashes when the selected effect is switched off Even when using the Quick Settings you can switch effects on and off with the effect ON OFF buttons Chapter 2 Creating Your Own Favorite Tones Patches Rotate the VALUE dial to select the Quick Setting you want The tone switches to that of the selected sample settings You can select User Setting to return the settings to their condition prior to selecting the Quick Settings To select Quick Settings for another effect repeat Steps 2 and 3 Even after performing this procedure the settings selected in Step 3 are maintained as is and carried over to the Quick Settings for the next effect Press EXIT
158. S w To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other This instrument is equipped with balanced XLR TRS devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power type MIC INPUT jacks Wiring diagrams for these jacks on all devices before making any connections are shown below Make connections after first checking Turn up guitar amp and audio amp volume levels and the GS the wiring diagrams of other mic you intend to connect 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL only after turning on the power to all connected devices 3 I 1 GND COLD mE 14 2 HOT HOT To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your 2 3 COLD GND unit should the plug be pulled out accidentally and to avoid applying undue stress to the AC adaptor jack Not compatible with phantom power anchor the power cord using the cord hook as shown in Howling could be produced depending on the location the illustration of mics relative to speakers This can be remedied by 1 Changing the orientation of the mic s POWER Neon OFF M 2 Relocating mic s at a greater distance from speakers 3 Lowering volume levels Tested To Comply With FCC Standards OME OR OFFICE USE 14 Chapter 1 Playing Sounds When using the unit with an expression pedal connected to the EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 jack set Minimum Volume to the MIN position Use only the specified expression pedal Roland EV 5 optional By connecting any other e
159. S 10 s internal tuner the note name is indicated in the upper row of the display and the Tuning Guide is shown in the lower row indicating the difference between the input sound and the sound in the display Note Name Tuning Guide When the difference from the correct pitch falls within 50 cents the Tuning Guide then indicates the size of that difference As you watch the Tuning Guide tune the guitar so that the M appears in the center Too High Tuned TooLow How to Tune 1 Playasingle open note on the string being tuned The name of the note closest to the pitch of the string that was played appears in the display Only play a single note on the one string being tuned 2 Tune the string until the string name appears in the display tf kk kd kand ba Regular 430000000 Down 1 Step Down 3 As you watch the Tuning Guide adjust the guitar s tuning until W appears in the center 4 Repeat Steps 1 3 until all of the strings are tuned When tuning guitars equipped with a tremolo bar when one string is tuned the others may end up being out of tune In this case tune to the pitch indicated by the initial note name then tune the other strings again repeatedly fine tuning each string Changing the Tuner Settings You can change the following tuner related settings Changing the Reference Pitch 435 445 Hz The frequency of A4 the middle A on a piano keyboard played by an instrument
160. Setting Up the Driver Windows Special Driver and Standard Driver The GS 10 features two operational modes each of which uses a different type of driver with one mode using the special driver on the CD ROM included with the GS 10 and the other mode using the standard Windows driver Before installing the drivers you must first switch the GS 10 s driver mode For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 B Special Driver Special Driver mode allows audio to be recorded played edited with high quality and stable timing Audio signals can be transferred between the GS 10 and the computer at a resolution of 24 bits and sampling frequencies of 44 1 KHz And in addition to audio you can also control the GS 10 using MIDI messages and connect external MIDI devices and computers Select this mode if you are using an application that allows high quality audio recording playback editing such as an application that supports 24 bit audio e g the Cakewalk series or Cool Edit or an ASIO compatible application e g Cubase VST Logic Audio or SingerSongWriter Installing the special driver p 127 B Standard Driver In Standard Driver mode audio signals are transferred between the GS 10 and the computer at a resolution of 16 bits and sampling frequencies of 44 1 KHz Select this mode if you are using an application that uses Window s own functionality such
161. T to return to the Play screen If you want to save a tone with the settings you ve made use the Write procedure p 25 to save the tone to a User patch 23 Chapter 2 Creating Your Own Favorite Tones Patches Changing the Connection Naming Patches Each patch can be given a name Patch Name consisting of up to sixteen characters You ll probably want to take advantage of this feature by assigning names that suggest the sound you ll obtain or the song in which it ll be used 3 2 LET EL LEVEL 5 a A 7 AGERE E SPEAKER II li C EAMP SPEAKER PATCH ALUE Aux iPUT OUTPUT MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL n e yl Gest pr PR GAIN BASS rr O r EXI a zm SYSTEM me md ai ind GS 10 GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM with USB AUDIO INTERFACE SE GUITAR BASS NAME NS EQ MASTER PHONES v Press NAME NS MASTER so that the Name edit screen appears in the display With each press of NAME NS MASTERI you move to the next item that can be set in this order Name Noise Suppressor Master Foot Volume Effect Chain Press PARAMETER Be to move the cursor to the text area you want to edit Rotate the PATCH V ALUE dial to change the characters You can use the following functions when changing text characters CAPS Switches the character at the cursor position between upper and lower cas
162. T jack is distorted Ifyouare inputting sound through the MIC INPUT jacks adjust the Mic Gain p 20 of the GS 10 to lower the input level Oscillating sound occurs LJ Is the AUX INPUT LEVEL knob turned up too high Ifinputting audio from AUX INPUT reduce the input level with the AUX INPUT LEVEL knob J Is Mic Gain set to a high value Lower the Mic Gain p 20 value J Is the value for any gain or volume related effects parameter set too high Lower these values Troubleshooting Other Problems Patch does not change _1 Is something other than the Play screen shown in the display On the GS 10 patches can be selected only when the Play screen is displayed Press EXIT to return to the Play screen p 15 Parameters specified with Assign can t be controlled LI Could the effect be switched off To control a parameter using the expression pedal or CTL pedal make sure the effect that contains the parameter you intend to control is switched on LJ Is something other than Assign 1 8 selected for the Expression Pedal function setting gt When operating an expression pedal connected to the EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 jack set the Expression Pedal function p 58 to Assign 1 8 L Is something other than Assign 1 8 selected for the CTL 1 2 function setting When operating a foot switch connected to the EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 jack set the CTL 1 2 function p 59 to
163. Time DD DlyTime F DD Tap Time DD Feedback DD High Cut Filter DD Effect Level CE On Off CE Mode CE Rate CE Depth CE Pre Delay CE Low Cut Filter CE High Cut Filter CE Effect Level RV On Off RV Type RV Reverb Time RV Pre Delay RV Low Cut Filter RV High Cut Filter RV Density RV Effect Level NS On Off NS Threshold NS Release FV Level Patch Level Master BPM TUNER On Off Master BPM Tap Delay Time Tap Remote Start Stop Patch Level Incl Patch Level Inc2 Patch Level Decl Patch Level Dec2 CH Select Inc CH Select Dec Assign Source EXP PEDAL CTL 1 CTL 2 MIDI CC 01 MIDI CC 31 MIDI CC 64 MIDI CC 95 METER Point Appendices 121 E Oo D 5 2 le rn Appendices GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM with USB AUDIO INTERFACE Date Jul 15 2003 Model GS 10 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 00 Function Basic Default 1 16 Channel Changed 1 16 X a a O O Ti 1 Bank Select 2 2 Control Change Program Number 0 127 1 128 Default Messages X Altered obo Note X Number True Voice DT Note ON Velocity Note OFE After Key s Touch Ch s Ill P OOOO Ox OO Prog Change True AAAAAAAAAAAAAA System Exclusive System Clock Real Time Command All sound off Reset AII Controller Local ON OFF Aux All Notes OFF Active Sense Message Reset 7 i i
164. US effect on off Mode Selection for the chorus mode Mono This chorus effect outputs the same sound from both L and R Stereol This is a stereo chorus effect that adds different chorus sounds to L and R Stereo2 This is a stereo chorus effect produced by synthesizing the spatial characteristics of the direct sound and the effect sound Rate Adjusts the rate of the chorus effect When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER Be to display the Master BPM settings screen Depth Adjusts the depth of the chorus effect To use it for doubling effect set the value to 0 Pre Delay Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the direct sound has been output By setting a longer pre delay time you can obtain an effect that sounds like more than one sound is being played at the same time doubling effect Low Cut Low Cut Filter This sets the frequency at which the low cut filter begins to take effect This lets you cut the low end component below the set frequency to create a clear distinct low end thereby bringing out the high end of the effect When Flat is selected the
165. ain Effects are shown in lowercase letters when turned off 2 Use the PATCH VALUE dial or PARAMETER a B to move the cursor to the point where you want to have an effect inserted 3 Press the On Off button for the effect you want to insert The selected effect is inserted at the cursor position Use ASSIGNI to assign Foot Volume 4 If you want to change the sequence further repeat Steps 2 and 3 5 If you want to save the sequence you ve set up use the Write procedure p 25 to save it to a User patch Press EXIT to return to the Play screen MED Effects can be switched on and off even while making the settings for the connection order With effects appearing to the left and right of the cursor the ON OFF button corresponding to the effect can be pressed to turn them on off Chapter 5 Creating Original Effects Types Customize With the GS 10 s Customize function you can rely on your own sensibilities and create a totally new effect by tweaking the settings for the Preamp Speaker Simulator Overdrive Distortion and Pedal Wah The result can then be saved on the GS 10 as Custom settings You can also use these custom settings in other patches The trademarks listed in this document are trademarks of their respective owners which are separate companies from BOSS Those companies are not affiliated with BOSS and have not licensed or authorized BOSS s GS 10 Their mar
166. all the driver in Windows XP 2000 you must be logged into Windows as a user with administrative privileges such as Administrator For details please contact the system administrator for your computer system Did you make Driver Signing Options In order to install re install the driver you must make Driver Signing Options Windows XP p 127 Windows 2000 p 131 Windows Windows XP 2000 displays a Hardware Installation or Digital Signature Not Found dialog box L gt Did you make Driver Signing Options In order to install re install the driver you must make the settings described in Driver Signing Options Windows XP p 127 Windows 2000 p 131 166 Troubleshooting Windows Device Manager shows 1 or USB Composite Device Windows The Insert Disk dialog box does not appear Use the following procedure to re install the driver Turn off the power of your computer and start up Windows with all USB cables disconnected except for keyboard and mouse 2 After Windows restarts use a USB cable to connect the GS 10 to your computer 3 Click the Windows Start button and from the menu that appears choose Settings Control Panel 4 Double click the System icon The System Properties dialog box will appear ul Click the Device Manager tab 6 Check whether you can see an indication of 2Composite USB Device USB Device
167. amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh Installing the OS standard driver 9 The installation procedure will differ depending on your system Please proceed to one of the following sections depending on the system you use e Mac OS 9 8 users Pe 157 Mac OS X users A p 160 Mac OS 9 8 users With the GS 10 disconnected start up Mac OS Exit all currently running software applications If you are using a virus checker or similar software be sure to exit it as well After starting up Mac OS select Apple System Profiler from the Apple menu The Apple System Profiler dialog box will appear Hle Edit View Window About This Computer N AirPort da Apple 5ystem Profiler Calculator Click the Devices and Volumes tab Before connecting the USB cable switch the GS 10 s driver mode to Standard For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 With the power switch turned OFF use the USB cable to connect the GS 10 to your computer Make sure that the GS 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL is set to the lowest setting then switch ON the POWER switch Wait for approximately five seconds While you are waiting the screen display will not change but the GS 10 is being detected Do not touch the mouse or keyboard In order to check that detection has been completed once again go to Apple System Profiler
168. arameter should be set only when Square is selected for the wave PWM Depth Pulse Wise Modulation Depth This adjusts the depth of the PWM When it is set to 0 no PWM effect is obtained This parameter should be set only when Square is selected for the wave Cutoff Freq Cutoff Frequency This adjusts the frequency where the harmonics contents of the sound are cut off Resonance This adjusts how much of the harmonics contents around the cutoff frequency should be emphasized FLT Sens Filter Sensitivity This adjusts the sensitivity of the filter When it is set to a lower value the filter is affected only with stronger picking When it is set higher the filter changes even with weaker picking When it is set to 0 the depth of the filter will be the same no matter how the picking strength may be FLT Decay Filter Decay This sets the time needed for the filter to finish its sweep FLT Depth Filter Depth This adjusts the depth of the filter When the value is higher the filter will change more drastically The polarity of the filter will be opposite with and Attack This adjusts the time needed for a synthesizer sound to reach its maximum When it is set to a lower value the sound will rise quickly When it is set higher the sound will rise slowly When it is set to Decay the sound will rise quickly and turn to a Release status regardless of the input of the guitar sound
169. atch 001 User Patch Patch 002 User Patch Patch 100 User Patch Patch 101 Preset Patch Patch 200 Preset Patch Temporary Buffer Bulk Temporary Buffer Individual 00 Off 01 On 00 PW 01 AW 02 TM 03 ACS 04 LM 05 ENH 06 SG 07 TR 08 DF 09 RM OA FB 00 CRY WAH 01 VO WAH 02 Fat WAH 03 Light WAH 04 7String WAH 05 Resonance WAH 06 Bass WAH 07 Customl 08 Custom2 09 Custom3 0 100 0 100 00 LPF 01 BPF 00 Down 01 Up 0 100 0 100 0 100 Refer to Table Rate 0 100 0 100 00 Fat 01 Presence 02 Mild 03 Tight 04 Enhance 05 S to H 06 H to S 07 H to HF 08 S to Hollow 09 H to Hollow 0A S to Acoustic 0B H to Acoustic 0C P to Acoustic 50 50 50 50 0 100 00 Stereo Comp 01 BOSS Comp 02 D Comp 0 100 0 100 50 50 0 100 00 Stereo Limiter Appendices 109 E Oo D 5 2 le L Appendices Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk COMP Kk Kk Kk OD DS Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk 01 01 01
170. atch Does Not Switch On the GS 10 you cannot switch patches in any screen other than the Play screen Press EXIT to return to the Play screen p 15 Chapter 2 Creating Your Own Favorite Tones Patches Selecting the Input INPUT SELECT This selects the input signal to which the effects are added This is also used for setting the type of device connected to the input connector To derive the maximum performance from the GS 10 be sure to make the correct setting for INPUT SELECT the one that s most suitable for your setup You may not be able to achieve the expected effect if this is not set correctly PATCH ALUE AUX INPUT OUTPUT MIDDLE arc PRESENCE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL p eel ar Ew ES SL e K COMED emm ED D lt 4 PARAMETER gt USB SPPAKER P OD DS DELAY ICHORUS REVERB C C J L O t JUMmP EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM oO DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 2 i 3 4 NAME NS O LE E E EQ MASTER C GS IQ GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM INPUT QUICK e with USB AUDIO INTERFACE d 2 ASSIGN SELECT C m C IST INS CAPS PHONES GUITAR BASS v 1 Press INPUT SELECT The Input Select settings screen appears 2 Turn the PATCH VALUE dial to change the settings Guitar You can add effects to the signals input from the GUITAR BASS INPUT connector when a guitar is connected Signals from MIC INPUT are disregarded and the signals input to the GS 10 from the USB or AUX INPUT
171. by combining EXIT and DIRECT PATCH 1 4 Make the connections as shown below DIRECT PATCH L 2 3 4 WWW Reset Stop Play Rec The Reset Stop Play and Rec functions are assigned to DIRECT PATCH 1 4 When you press these buttons while holding down EXIT the messages corresponding to the MIDI Remote Ctrl setting are transmitted MIDIIN V a EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 When MIDI Remote Ctrl is set to Standard MIDI System messages are transmitted MIDI OUT B No function EL LL Cy OL TURBO ni Me ge SS c PATCH No function DANCE Neither FA nor FC can be transmitted consecutively For more on the operation of the connected device refer to the owner s manual for the device you are using When MIDI Remote Ctrl is set to Advanced Some computer applications allow recording and playback functions such as Start and Stop to be assigned Setting to specified MIDI messages 1 Follow the instructions in Setting the Messages Used When set to this setting Note messages used in for Controlling Devices p 75 to set the messages that are to be used for remote control Press SYSTEM a number of times then press PARAMETER lt B so that SYS CTL1 Func or SYS CTL2 Func is displayed If connecting only one f
172. cable to connect the GS 10 to your computer MEMO 9 Make sure that the GS 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL is set to the lowest setting then This unit is equipped with a switch ON the POWER switch protection circuit A brief interval a f ds aft Windows will detect the GS 10 and the Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box will appear uon e SES DUM Soste power up is required before Add New Hardware Wizard the unit will operate normally Windows has found the following new hardware USB Audio Device Windows can automatically search for and install software that supports your hardware If your hardware came with installation media insert it now and click Next What would you like to do Iter C Specify the location of the driver Advanced Cancel Make sure that Automatic search for a better driver Recommended is selected and click Next Driver detection will begin When the driver has been found driver installation will begin Once the driver has been installed a dialog box will inform you of this Add New Hardware Wizard es USB Audio Device Windows has finished installing the new hardware device 7 Click Finish 8 Restart Windows Next you need to make the driver settings p 141 137 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows 6 7 Windows 98 users The USB composite device driver is installed first then the USB audio
173. ce 0 100 Level 0 100 Bright Off On Gain SW Low Middle High SP Type Off Original 1x8 1x10 1X12 1X15 1X18 2X12 2X15 4X10 4X12 8X10 8X12 Custom 1 Custom 2 Mic Type DYN57 DYN421 CND451 CND87 FLAT Mic Dis Off Mic On Mic Mic Pos Center 1 10 Mic Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 No effect when OUTPUT Select is set to Line Phones On Off Effect On Off Turns the PREAMP SPEAKER effect on off CH Select Channel Select Selects the preamp channel whose settings are to be changed Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Type Lead Stack This is a lead sound with high gain This sets the type of the guitar preamp 5150 Drive This models the lead channel of a Peavey EVH 5150 JC 120 This is the sound of the Roland JC 120 Metal Stack This is a drive sound suited to metal This is a sound suited to jazz Metal Lead This is a lead sound suited to metal Thisis a sound with flat response Good for Full Range acoustic guitar CONCERT 810 This models a Ampeg SVT This gives a mellow clean sound SESSION This models a SWR SM 400 Clean TWIN This models a Fender Twin Reverb BASS 360 This models a acoustic 360 T E This models a Trace Elliot AH600SMX This models a Fender Pro Reverb This models a Fender Bassman 4 x 10 Tweed Combo B MAN This models a Fender Bassman100 This is a crunch sound that can produce Crunch A i natural
174. ces 87 E Oo D 5 2 le rn Appendices 88 The size of the requested data does not indicate the number of bytes that will make up a DT1 message but represents the address fields where the requested data resides Some models are subject to limitations in data format used for a single transaction Requested data for example may have a limit in length or must be divided into predetermined address fields before it is exchanged across the interface The same number of bytes comprises address and size data which however vary with the Model ID The error checking process uses a checksum that provides a bit pattern where the last 7 bits are zero when values for an address size and that checksum are summed Data set 1 DT1 12H This message corresponds to the actual data transfer process Because every byte in the data is assigned a unique address a DT1 message can convey the starting address of one or more bits of data as well as a series of data formatted in an address dependent order The MIDI standards inhibit non real time messages from interrupting an Exclusive one This fact is inconvenient for devices that support a soft thru function To maintain compatibility with such devices Roland has limited the DT1 to 256 bytes so that an excessively long message is sent out in separate segments Exclusive Status Manufacturer ID Roland Device ID Model ID Command ID Address MSB
175. ches to the pedal bend function when PB is selected IS Setting the External Expression Pedal Functions Expression Pedal Function p 58 Parameter Value Pitch Min 24 24 Pitch Max 24 24 Pdl Position 0 100 Effect Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 Pitch Min This sets the pitch at the point where the expression pedal is fully lifted Pitch Max This sets the pitch at the point where the expression pedal is all the way down Pdl Position Pedal Position This adjusts the pedal position for pedal bend Effect Level This adjusts the volume of the pitch bend sound Direct Level Adjusts the volume of the direct sound 2CE 2x2 Chorus Two separate stereo chorus units are used for the low frequency and high frequency ranges in order to create a more natural chorus sound Parameter Value Xover f 100 Hz 4 00 kHz Lo Rate 0 100 BPM o BPM A Lo Depth 0 100 Lo PreDly 0 0 msec 40 0 msec Lo Level 0 100 Hi Rate 0 100 BPM o BPM A Hi Depth 0 100 Hi PreDly 0 0 msec 40 0 msec Hi Level 0 100 45 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Xover f Crossover Frequency This parameter sets the frequency at which the frequency components of the direct sound are divided into bass and treble bands Lo Rate Low Rate Adjust the speed of the chorus effect for the low frequency range When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of
176. ching the Output Signals Direct Monitor p 79 can be controlled from your ASIO 2 0 compatible application l As described in Opening the special driver settings dialog box p 163 open the Driver Settings dialog box 2 Check the Use ASIO Direct Monitor check box 3 Click OK to close the driver settings dialog box Depending on the application you are using there may be a ASIO Direct Monitor among the audio settings of the application as well For details refer to the operation manual for your application When using ASIO Direct Monitor monitoring may switch on off at unexpected times depending on the application settings and on the recording procedure If this occurs uncheck the check box in step 2 to disable ASIO Direct Monitor 162 Setting the Special Driver s Functions Opening the special driver settings dialog box If using Windows 1 Open the Control Panel and double click BOSS GS 10 The BOSS GS 10 Driver Settings dialog box will appear n Windows XP click Switch to classic view to switch the display to the classic view BOSS GS 10 will not be displayed unless the classic view is selected n Windows Me click View all Control Panel options If using Macintosh 1 Openthe ASIO Control Panel from the Audio Settings dialog box of your ASIO compatible application The name of the Audio Settings dialog box and the procedure for opening the ASIO Control Panel will differ depe
177. cis Di e 5 ve GS 1 GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM with USB AUDIO INTERFACE GUITAR BASS 25 0512 PATCF f ALUE AUX IPUT OUTPUT LI f EL LEVEL PREAMP SPEAKER BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL PARAMETER gt gt EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM DIRECT PATO TUNER 1 2 3 4 PEDAL WAH LIMITER DEFRETTER NAMEZNS d d d SENHANCER Ramon DC MASTER TONE MODIFY SLOW GEAR eus CJ C SADWCOMP TREMOLO S GUITAR EFFECTS STEM INPUT with USB AUDIO IN ERFACE PHASER 242 CHORUS HINNE py ASSIGN AU IBARMONIST VIBRATO AUTORI o Em 00 O HI OCTAVE RO BASS SIM PEDAL BEND SORTE DELAY STEREO EQ PHONES GUITAR BASS w 1 Press SYSTEM then press PARAMETER lt B so that MIDI Bulk Dump is displayed 2 Press PARAMETER B to move the cursor and rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to select the start and end of the data to be transmitted 3 When the data to be sent has been determined press WRITE The data is transmitted 71 un o A Q 00 Chapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected When the transmission is completed the screen prior to transmission returns to the display 4 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Receiving Data from an External MIDI Device Bulk Load Making the Connections When Receivi
178. ck the System icon displayed go to the included The System Properties dialog box will appear CD ROM folder named DRIVER USB_XP2k open the file Readme e htm and read General Network Identification Hardware User Profiles Advanced the Troubleshooting section Hardware Wizard The Hardware wizard helps you install uninstall repair SA unplug eject and Sonar vola hardware entitled You attempted to exl install using the above Device Manager CH The Device Manager lists all the hardware devices installed procedure but were not able Gee on your computer Use the Device Manager to change the C pronetties af anu i f arw devi Driver Signing Device Manager Hardware Profiles ZE to 3 Hardware profiles provide a way for you to set up and store zg different hardware configurations O Hardware Profiles You must log on using a user name with an administrative account type e g Administrator 3 Click the Hardware tab and then click Driver Signature Open the Driver Signing Options dialog box Driver Signing Options 3 2 x To ensure their integrity all files on the Windows 2000 CD are digitally signed by Microsoft and are automatically verified during Setup When you install new software the Following verification settings will be used File signature verification Ignore Install all files regardless of file signature C Warn Display a mes
179. control of external ports used by MIDI interfaces until all OMS applications have quit vote If a MIDI sound module is 12 Verify that MIDI transmission and reception occur correctly connected to the GS 10 the From the Studio menu choose Test Studio following step will cause a relatively loud sound to be studio Help produced by the sound New Device 0 New Patcher MIDI Cards amp Interfaces Add Device Per Port sound module first Auto Detect Devices MIDI Device Info Device Icon Different In Out Ports Test Studio T Sort by Port Name 13 If a MIDI sound module is connected to the GS 10 s MIDI OUT connector click the GS 10 MIDI IN OUT icon in the Studio Setup window If you hear sound the settings have been made correctly module so it is a good idea to turn down the volume on the CT o My Studio Setup E Go Chs 1 16 RI IAC Driver Studio Patches pgm chg geo QuickTime Music ct BOSS GS 10 ae CAE ons H Ir GS 10 CONTROL GS 10 MIDI IN OUT corresponds to the GS 10 s MIDI IN MIDI OUT GS 10 CONTROL corresponds to the GS 10 s control port 14 After you have verified this and exit OMS Setup 15 Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software For details on settings refer to the manual that came with your software Next you need to install the ASIO driver p 154 150 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintos
180. creen Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum picked up by guitar pickups Since it suppresses the noise in synchronization with the envelope of the guitar sound the way in which the guitar sound decays over time it has very little effect on the guitar sound and does not harm the natural character of the sound Please connect the noise suppressor in the signal path prior to the reverberation type effect This setup will prevent an natural break of the reverberation type effect Parameter Value On Off Off On Threshold 0 100 Helease 0 100 On Off Effect On Off Turns the noise suppressor effect on off This parameter can be set with the PATCH VALUE dial Even if NAME NS MASTER is pressed you cannot switch the noise suppressor on and off Threshold Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the guitar sound is as natural as possible High settings for the threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your guitar volume turned down Release Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until the noise level reaches 0 53 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Master Parameter Value Patch Level 0 200 Master BPM 40 250 Patch Lev
181. custom Custom 2 or Custom 3 parameters 4 Press PARAMETER lt B to show the custom 5 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to change the setting s parameters value 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as needed P uem Mop se mers E 7 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Parameter Value 9 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to change the setting s value Speaker Size 5 15 Color Low 10 10 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as needed Color High 10 10 7 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Speaker Num x1 x2 x4 x8 Cabinet Open Close Parameter Value Speaker Size Type OD 1 OD 2 CRUNCH DS 1 Selects the size of speaker DS 2 METAL 1 METAL 2 FUZZ Color Low Bottom 50 50 Adjusts the speaker section s low frequency tone Top 90 50 Low 50 50 Color High High 50 50 Adjusts the speaker section s high frequency tone Speaker Num Speaker Number Sets the number of speakers Cabinet Selects the speaker cabinet type Open This is an open backed cabinet 56 Chapter 5 Creating Original Effects Types Customize Type Selects the basic type of overdrive distortion OD 31 This is the sound of the BOSS OD 1 OD2 This is the sound of the BOSS OD 2 CRUNCH This is a crunch sound of the BOSS BD 2 This gives a basic traditional distortion sound FUZZ JJ This models a FUZZFACE Bottom Adjusts the amount of distortion in the low frequencies Top Adjusts the amount of distortion in the high fre
182. d click OK D DRIVER USB_XP2k The drive name D may be different for your system Specify the drive name of your CD ROM drive The file Rd4t1030 DAT on BOSS GS 10 Driver 4 Installation disk is needed Cancel Type the path where the file is located and then click OK Copy files from D ADRIVERNUSB XP2K DI Browse If the File signature verification setting in step 4 was not set to Ignore a Digital Signature Not Found dialog box will appear Digital Signature Not Found x The Microsoft digital signature affirms that software has been tested with Windows and that the software has not been altered since it was tested The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature Therefore there is no guarantee that this software works corectly with Windows BOSS GS 10 MME If you want to search for Microsoft digitally signed software visit the Windows Update Web site at http windowsupdate microsoft com to see if one is available Do you want to continue the installation Yes No More Info Click Yes and continue the installation The Find New Hardware Wizard may be displayed Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard GE BOSS GS 10 Windows has finished installing the software for this device The hardware you installed will not work until you restart your computer To close this wizard click Finish
183. d settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER Be to display the Master BPM settings screen Vib Depth Vibrato Depth This adjusts the depth of the vibrato when the feedbacker is on FX 2 With FX 2 you can select the effect to be used from the following e PHASER e FLANGER e HARMONIST e PITCH SHIFT Pitch Shifter e OCTAVE e PEDAL BEND e 2x2 CHORUS e PAN e VIBRATO e UNI V e ROTARY e SHORT DELAY e HUMANIZER e SLICER e AUTO RIFF e GUITAR SYNTH e BASS SIM Bass Simulator e STEREO EO Stereo Equalizer Parameter Value On Off Off On FX Select PH FL HR PS OC PB 2CE PAN VB UV RT SDD HU SL AR SYN BS SEQ On Off Effect On Off Switches the FX 2 effect on off FX Select Effect select This selects the effect to be used 41 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters PH Phaser By adding varied phase portions to the direct sound the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound Parameter Value Type 4 Stage 8 Stage 12 Stage Bi Phase Hate 0 100 BPM BPM A Depth 0 100 Manual 0 100 Hesonance 0 100 Step Rate Off 0 100 BPM BPM Effect Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 Type Selects the number of stages that the phaser effect will use This is a four phase effect A lig
184. device driver is installed Use the following procedure to install the drivers With the GS 10 disconnected start up Windows Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse if used Exit all currently running software applications Also close any open windows If you are using virus checking or similar software be sure to exit it aswell Before connecting the USB cable switch the GS 10 s driver mode to Standard For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 With the power switch turned OFF use the USB cable to connect the GS 10 to your computer Make sure that the GS 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL is set to the lowest setting then switch ON the POWER switch USB composite device will be detected automatically and the Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box will appear Add New Hardware Wizard This wizard searches for new drivers for USB Composite Device A device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work Click Next When What do you want Windows to do appears select Search for the best driver for your device Recommended and click Next Add New Hardware Wizard What do you want Windows to do Search for the best driver for your device Recommended i j C Display a list of all the drivers in a specific location so you can select the driver you want lt Back Cancel
185. dio data internally through a computer Thru This is set to On when shipped from the factory fyou are using the special driver you can control Direct Monitor On Off from ASIO 2 0 compatible application such as Cubase 4 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Setting the Output Mode This selects whether the output is in stereo or if the effect sound and direct sound are output separately l Press USB 2 Press PARAMETER lt gt so that Output Mode is displayed 3 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to set the output mode Stereo L R Sounds are output in stereo Effect Direct The effect sound and direct sound are output separately and independently This is set to Stereo L R when shipped from the factory 4 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen 79 Chapter 9 Using the GS 10 Connected to a Computer Via USB Switching the Driver Mode After first installing both the special and standard drivers and then switching the GS 10 s driver mode you can switch between the special driver and the standard driver to use the one you need For more on installing the drivers refer to Installing amp Setup the USB Driver p 125 Press USB x Press PARAMETER B so that Driver Mode is displayed x Rotate the PATCH V ALUE dial to set the driver mode Standard The standard OS USB driver is used in this mode Advanced The special driver on the
186. dividual Refer to Table USB Setting Individual Refer to Table HARMONIST Individual Refer to Table AUTO RIFF Individual Refer to Table AMP Individual Refer to Table SPEAKER Individual Refer to Table 0D DS Individual Refer to Table WAH Read Only Individual Refer to Table Quick Fx Data Read Only Individual Refer to Table Quick Fx Name Individual Refer to Table Patch Read Only Individual Refer to Table Patch Bulk Refer to Table Patch Individual Refer to Table Patch Individual Refer to Table Patch Change Individual Refer to Table Patch Write Read Only Individual Refer to Table Current Patch Individual Refer to Table Patch Initialize Individual Refer to Table AMP Ch Copy Individual Refer to Table Quick Fx Number Read Only Individual Refer to Table Quick Fx Count Individual Refer to Table TUNER METER Appendices 91 E Oo D 5 2 le L Appendices Patch Change When transmitted Transmits the patch number DATA Patch Number When received Changes the Patch DATA Patch Number Data size is fixed at 2 bytes Upon receiving ROI the GS 10 replies with the patch number Request size to the GS 10 at this time is fixed at 2 bytes set at 00 00 00 02 Patch Write When received After the patch is written the patch is switched t
187. do you want Windows to take Ignore Install the software anyway and don t ask For my approval O Warn Prompt me each time to choose an action O Block Never install unsigned driver software Administrator option Make this action the system default 4 Make sure that What action do you want Windows to take is set to Ignore If currently set to Warn or Block set it to Ignore here then after installing the driver restore the original setting 9 Click OK to close the System Properties dialog box 6 Exit all currently running software applications Also close any open windows If you are using virus checking or similar software be sure to exit it as well 7 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of your computer 8 Click the Windows start button From the menu that appears select Run Open the Run dialog box 127 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows 9 Inthe dialog box that appears input the following into the Open field and click OK D DRIVER USB_XP2k SETUPINF EXE The drive name D may be different for your system Specify the drive name of your CD ROM drive ER Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For vau DDRIVERIUSB P2kISETUPINE EXE SetupIinf mi ka Ready to install the driver 1 Please use a USB cable to connectthe GS 10 and your computer
188. does not support 24 bit audio input output it will not operate correctly if you select GS 10 ASIO1 0 24bit or GS 10 ASIO2 0 24bit as the ASIO driver In this case select either GS 10 ASIO1 0 16bit or GS 10 ASIO2 0 16bit as the ASIO driver 169 Troubleshooting Macintosh d gt Is the GS 10 connected to a USB hub Try connecting the GS 10 directly to the USB connector of the Macintosh itself Macintosh d gt Are you using a USB device other than the GS 10 Try turning off the power of all USB audio devices other than the GS 10 Windows Macintosh gt In some cases you may also be able to solve this problem by grounding the chassis of your computer or the grounding connector of the AC power supply plug of your computer In addition you can check whether any devices that produce a strong magnetic field are located nearby such as a television or microwave oven Also check the troubleshooting item Sound is interrupted during audio recording playback Sound is interrupted during audio recording playback Wi M d gt indows acintosh Are many applications running on your computer If you use many applications or start up other applications during playback playback may be interrupted depending on your computer system Please exit unneeded applications and try again If this does not resolve the problem try restarting your computer Windows d x P Graphic accelerato
189. e INS Inserts a blank space at the cursor position DEL Deletes the character at the cursor position and shifts the characters following it to the left If you want to edit names further repeat Steps 2 and 3 If you want to save the sequence you ve set up use the Write procedure p 25 to save it to a User patch Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Order of Effects Effect Chain Here s how you can change the order in which the effects are connected OUTPUT LEVEL DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 3 4 NAME NS C LN CN UM EQ MASTER C GS 10 GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM men mp w n os p y INPUT Bw with USB AUDIO INTERFACE duree a 1L w E AZ PEDALBEND SHORTDELAY s AE DEL CAPS GUITAR BASS Press NAME NS MASTER until Effect Chain appears in the display With each press of NAME NS MASTERI you move to the next item that can be set in this order Name Noise Suppressor Master Foot Volume gt Effect Chain Effects are shown in lowercase letters when turned off Use the PATCH VALUE dial or PARAMETER lt B to move the cursor to the point where you want to have an effect inserted Press the On Off button for the effect you want to insert The selected effect is inserted at the cursor position Use ASSIGN to assign Foot Volume If you want to change the sequence further repeat Steps 2 and 3 If you want to save the sequence you ve set up us
190. e Fast Medium Slow Mono Pitch 24 24 Fine 50 50 PreDly 0 ms 300 ms BPM DEM Feedback 0 100 Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 Voice This selects the number of voices for the pitch shift sound 1 Voice One voice pitch shifted sound output in monaural 2 Mono Two voice pitch shifted sound PS1 PS2 output in monaural 2 Stereo Two voice pitch shifted sound PS1 PS2 output through left and right channels Mode Selection for the pitch shifter mode Fast Medium Slow A chord can be input with a normal pitch shifter The response is slower in the order of Fast Medium and Slow but the modulation is lessened in the same order Mono This mode is used for inputting single notes Use this setting when you want to achieve a pedal bend effect with an external expression pedal Pitch Adjusts the amount of pitch shift the amount of pitch change in semitone steps Fine Make fine adjustments to the pitch shift The amount of the change in the Fine 100 is equivalent to that of the Pitch 1 PreDly Pre Delay Adjusts the time from when the direct sound is heard until the pitch shifted sounds are heard Normally you can leave this set at Oms Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound se
191. e of the defretter sound Direct Level Adjust the volume of the direct sound RM Ring Modulator This creates a bell like sound by ring modulating the guitar sound with the signal from the internal oscillator The sound will be unmusical and lack distinctive pitches Parameter Value Mode Normal Intelligent Freq 0 100 Effect Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 Mode This selects the mode for the ring modulator Normal This is a normal ring modulator Intelligent By ring modulating the input signal a bell like sound is created The intelligent ring modulator changes the oscillation frequency according to the pitch of the input sound and therefore produces a sound with the sense of pitch which is quite different from Normal This effect does not give a satisfactory result if the pitch of the guitar sound is not correctly detected So you must use single notes not chords Freq Frequency This adjusts the frequency of the internal oscillator Effect Level This adjusts the volume of the effect sound Direct Level This adjusts the volume of the direct sound FB Feedbacker This allows you to use feedback playing techniques Note that the notes you want to apply feedback to must be played singly and cleanly You can use the foot switch to switch the effect on and off For more details refer to Setting the External Pedal Function for Individual Patches Assign p 60 Parameter Value
192. e the Write procedure p 25 to save it to a User patch Press EXIT to return to the Play screen ven Effects can be switched on and off even while making the settings for the connection order excluding FV NS and USB With effects appearing to the left and right of the cursor the ON OFF button corresponding to the effect can be pressed to turn them on off Chapter 3 Saving the Tones You Have Created Storing Patches PATCH WRITE When you want to keep a tone created with the Quick Settings or a tone with altered parameter values use the Write procedure to save it to a User patch fthe power is turned off or if the tone is switched Patch Change p 18 before you ve carried out the Write procedure the newly created tone will be discarded PREAMP SPEAKER PATCF ALUE AUX INPUT OUTPUT GAIN BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL 25 Ss LEVEL LEVEL A 4 PARAMETER gt USB ovo Oeo J O JUMP EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM CJ DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 4 NAMENS UCI WWW PEDALWAH LIMITER DEFREITER FX 1 EQ MASTER MI SLOW GEAR FEEDBACKER SADV COME SS TREMOLO G5 1 J GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM PHASER TANIZER INPUT with USB AUDIO INTERFACE er VIBRATO war SE aSo SELECT Qu a E w EAZ PEDALBEND SHORTDELAY STEREO EQ INS DEL CAPS PHONES GUITAR BASS v E 1 3 1 Press WRITE The screen for specifying the save destination User patch appears in the display Save
193. ear Digital Signature Not Found X The Microsoft digital signature affirms that software has been tested with Windows and that the software has not been altered since it was tested The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature Therefore there is no guarantee that this software works correctly with Windows BOSS GS 10 If you want to search for Microsoft digitally signed software visit the Windows Update Web site at http windowsupdate microsoft com to see if one is available Do you want to continue the installation Yes No More Info If the Yes button appears click the Yes button to continue with the installation If you are unable to continue click No or OK to begin the driver installation over again from Step 1 NOTE If the Insert Disk dialog box does not appear please read The Insert Disk dialog box does not appear p 167 The Insert Disk dialog box will appear 132 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows Insert Disk ee E Please insert the floppy disk labeled BOSS GS 10 p Driver Installation disk into drive D and then click OK Y ou can also click OK if you want files to be copied from an alternate location such as a network server or a compact disc 13 Click OK The Files Needed dialog box will appear 14 In the Copy files from field type the folder name that is shown in the dialog box an
194. earch 6 When the search has been completed verify that the OMS Driver Setup dialog box lists the BOSS GS 10 and click OK OMS Driver Setup OMS has detected the following devices installed on your computer This list does not include external MIDI devices like sound modules keyboards and drum machines Studio Patches pgm chg ec BOSS GS 10 DD quicktime Music RIJ IAC Driver Click 0K if this list is correct Click Troubleshoot if this list is incorrect or incomplete Click Customize to add drivers manually Click Cancel to abort OMS setup Ifthe dialog box does not show BOSS GS 10 check whether the GS 10 is connected correctly and start up OMS Setup once again 7 Verify that the OMS MIDI Device Setup dialog box lists the GS 10 Then click all check boxes from Port 1 to Port 2 to check them and click OK A dialog box will appear allowing you to save the settings in a file OMS MIDI Device Setup Below is a representation of your studio setup Ports on which OMS detected MIDI devices are shown by name and have device icons Ports on which OMS detected no devices have keyboard question mark icons Check the MIDI ports you wish to use and leave the others unchecked CD quicktime Music Say BOSS GS 10 b ital Port 1 Port 2 Click OK when this list is co
195. ect is obtained even with a weak picking Rise Time This adjusts the time needed for the volume to reach its maximum from the moment you begin picking TR Tremolo Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Parameter Value Wave Shape 0 100 Hate 0 100 BPM BPM A Depth 0 100 Wave Shape This adjusts changes in volume level Rate Adjusts the frequency speed of the change When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Depth Adjusts the depth of the effect 39 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters DF Defretter This simulates a fretless guitar Parameter Value Tone 50 50 Sens 0 100 Attack 0 100 Depth 0 100 Hesonance 0 100 Effect Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 Tone Adjusts the amount of blurring between the notes Sens Sensitivity This controls the input sensitivity of the defretter Attack Adjusts the attack of the picking sound Depth This controls the rate of the harmonics Resonance Adds a characteristically resonant quality to the sound Effect Level Adjust the volum
196. egistered trademarks of their respective owners Copyright C 2003 Roland Corporation All rights reserved Any alteration modification duplication distribution or reproduction of this material is prohibited Te Continue 5 Click Continue The display will indicate Select a Destination 6 Click the drive on which the system is installed then click Continue The display will indicate Easy Install r e Install BOSS GS 10 USB Driver Easy Install Introduction Select Destination Installation Type Click Install to perform a basic installation of this software package GoBack install 7 Click Install or Update The display will indicate Installing this software requires you to restart installation is done Are you sure you installing this software requires you to restart your computer when the D L want to install the software now 9 155 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh 8 Click Continue Installation The display will indicate The software was successfully installed e Install BOSS GS 10 USB Driver Install Software Introduction OSelect Destination Installation Type lnstalling Finish Up The software was successfully installed _ 21214 1_ n Click Restart to finish installing the software 9 Click Restart to restart your Macintosh 156 Installing
197. el This adjusts the output volume of the GS 10 Master BPM Adjust the BPM value for each patch BPM beats per minute indicates the number of quarter note beats that occur each minute When you have an external MIDI device connected the Master BPM synchronizes to the external MIDI device s tempo making it impossible to set the Master BPM To enable setting of the Master BPM set MIDI Sync Clock p 69 to Internal Control with the Master BPM To input the Master BPM with the foot switch set Assign as follows Quick Setting p 60 P11 MSTR BPM TAP Manual Settings p 61 Set ASSIGN to ON and set the following as shown Target Master BPM Tap Target Min Off Target Max On CTL 1 or CTL 2 Normal Source Source Mode Act Range Lo 0 Act Range Hi 127 When controlling the Assigns with the foot switch the system parameter CTL 1 Func or CTL 2 Func must be set to Assign 1 8 p 58 p 59 Foot Volume This is a volume control effect Usually this is controlled to the expression pedal Parameter Value Level 0 100 Level Adjusts the volume Effect Chain Here s how you can change the order in which the effects are connected 1 Press NAME NS MASTER until Effect Chain appears in the display With each press of INAME NS MASTERI you move to the next item that can be set in this order Name Noise Suppressor Master Foot Volume gt Effect Ch
198. el the copy press EXIT The Play screen returns to the display 4 Press WRITE The GS 10 switches to the copy destination patch and you re returned to the Play screen The sound of the patch previously stored at the copy destination will be lost once the copy is executed 25 Chapter 3 Saving the Tones You Have Created Exchanging Patches On the GS 10 you can swap or exchange the positions of two User patches The following explains how this is done 4 3 AUXINPUT OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL PATCF ALUE PREAMP SPEAKER GAIN BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL a PARAMETER USB SEEAKE R CJ CS GJG O JUMP EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM CJ Oo JO DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 4 DI WWW SE GS GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM PHASER 2x2 CHORUS ETT with USB AUDIO INTERFACE PHONES GUITAR BASS Ww 2 9 1 Select the exchange source patch Refer to Patch Change p 18 2 Press WRITE 3 Press PARAMETER B The screen for specifying the exchange destination patch number appears in the display Exchange destination patch 4 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to select the exchange destination User patch To cancel the exchange press EXIT The Play screen returns to the display 5 Press WRITE The patch stored in the exchange source memory location and the patch stored in the exchange destination memory location are exchanged and you re returned to the Play screen Initializi
199. encies Edge Adjusts the amount of distortion in the high frequencies Bass Freq Bass Frequency Adjusts the frequency affected by the BASS knob Treble Freq Treble Frequency Adjusts the frequency affected by the TREBLE knob Preamp Low Adjusts the preamp section s low frequency tone Preamp High Adjusts the preamp section s high frequency tone 55 Chapter 5 Creating Original Effects Types Customize Customizing the Speakers Close This type of cabinet features an enclosed rear panel You can make three different sets of settings Custom 1 and Custom 2 The sound of any patch that uses Custom 1 or 2 will be altered C US tom IZI ng Ove rd rive a nd if the custom settings are edited Disto rtion 1 Press the PREAMP SPEAKER On Off switch to display the PREAMP SPEAKER effect screen You can make three different sets of settings Custom 1 Custom 2 and Custom 3 Press PARAMETER B to call up the SP The sound of any patch that uses Custom 1 2 or 3 will be Type parameter altered if the custom settings are edited 9 Rotate the PATCH V ALUE dial to call up Custom 1 1 Press the OD DS On Off switch to display the OD DS or Custom 2 effect screen JITEN Pie 2 Press PARAMETER lt B to call up the Type Beck Toemen dPoggcctoaunm 1 parameter 3 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to call up Custom 1 4 Press PARAMETER B to show the
200. es indicates a two octave rise SYN Guitar Synth This detects the pitch of an electric guitar and outputs a synthesizer sound When you use a quitar synthesizer observe the following points e t does not work properly when a chord is played Be sure to mute all the other strings and play in a single note e When you are to play the next string while a certain sound is still playing perfectly mute the previous sound then play the next one with a clear attack e If the unit cannot detect the attack it may not sound correctly Parameter Value Sens 0 100 Wave Square Saw Brass Bow Chromatic Off On Wave Square Saw Octave Shift 0 1 2 Wave Square Saw PWM Rate 0 100 Wave Square PWM Depth 0 100 Wave Square Cutoff Freq 0 100 Resonance 0 100 FLT Sens 0 100 FLT Decay 0 100 FLT Depth 100 100 Attack Decay 0 100 Release 0 100 Velocity 0 100 Hold Off On Wave Square Saw Synth Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 Sens Sensitivity This adjusts the input sensitivity The response of the internal sound source is better with a higher sensitivity value but the malfunctions will be increased on the other hand So try to set it as high as possible without causing malfunction Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Wave This selects a wave type that is the source of the guitar synthesizer Square The unit detects the pitch and attack information from the input guitar so
201. esn t swing too far to the right N o A y e N 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen 67 Chapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected The GS 10 s MIDI operations are altered when the GS 10 and the computer are connected via USB Also refer to Chapter 9 Using USB to Connect a Computer p 78 when making these connections Operations Using MIDI You can perform the following operations using MIDI with the GS 10 The use of MIDI requires that the MIDI channels of the connected devices match If the MIDI channel settings are not correct the GS 10 will be unable to exchange data with other MIDI devices Operating From the GS 10 Outputting Program Change Messages When a patch is selected on the GS 10 a Program Change message corresponding to the patch number is transmitted simultaneously The external MIDI device then switches its settings according to the Program Change message it receives O o DOO O O LH Dodo Ong O MIDI IN B MIDI OUT ES mem ES o o o 3500688 TE Wem em em em c De e o T vie COMP ob bs SUSTAIN DRIVE LEVEL C Pers FEEDBACK Lon LeveL LeveL C FX EQ GUITAR BASS EN Outputting Control Change Messages Data describing the actions of the external devices connected to the EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2
202. esult in oscillation 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Chapter 2 Creating Your Own Favorite Tones Patches Adjusting the Tones with the Knobs The GS 10 panel features 13 knobs for adjusting effect tones You can use these knobs to make slight adjustments to tones in the selected patch quickly and easily VM BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL AGeogs ES CHANNEL SELECT ePEDAL WAH LIMITER eDEFRETTER FX 1 H ENHANCER e RING MOD AUTO WAI e TONE MODIFY SLOW GEAR FEEDBACKER Ee ADV COMP TREMOLO e PHASER 2x2 CHORUS e HUMANIZER e FLANGER e SLICER HARMONIST e VIBRATO AUTO RIFF e PITCH SHIFTER UNI V e GTR SYNTH ROTARY BASS PEDALBEND SHORT DELAY STEREO EQ PREAMP GAIN Adjusts the degree of preamp distortion The distortion gets stronger as the knob is turned to the right PREAMP BASS Adjusts the sound quality of the preamp s low frequency range The low frequencies are boosted as the knob is turned to the right PREAMP MIDDLE Adjusts the sound quality of the preamp s midrange The midrange frequencies are boosted as the knob is turned to the right PREAMP TREBLE Adjusts the sound quality of the preamp s high frequency range The high frequencies are boosted as the knob is turned to the right PREAMP PRESENCE Adjusts the sound quality in the preamp s ultra high frequency range The ultra high frequencies are boosted as the knob i
203. et the input level MIDI messages and connect external MIDI devices to your computer 4 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Chapter 9 Using the GS 10 Connected to a Computer Via USB Enabling and Disabling the Direct Monitor Command This setting determines whether or not the command the Direct Monitor command controlling the Direct Monitor described later setting is enabled 1 Press USB 2 Press PARAMETER lt 4 B Monitor Cmd is displayed fig gt Use the PATCH VALUE dial to enable or disable the command Disable The Direct Monitor command is disabled maintaining the Direct Monitor mode set by the GS 10 Enable The Direct Monitor command is enabled allowing the Direct Monitor mode to be switched from an external device This is set to Disable when shipped from the factory 4 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Switching the Output Signals Direct Monitor This setting determines whether or not the effect sound is output by the GS 10 s speakers or at the PHONES OUTPUT L R or GUITAR AMP OUT jacks 1 Press USB 2 Press PARAMETER lt q B so that Dir Monitor is displayed P Rotate the PATCH V ALUE dial to set On or Off On The effect sound is output Set this to On when using the GS 10 as a standalone device without connecting to a computer no sound will be output if this is set to Off Off Set this to Off if transmitting au
204. etrate the unit S S e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors Or are e Never use or store the unit in places that are e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct e Immediately turn the power off remove the AC adaptor from the outlet and request servicing by your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information sheet when e Humid or are e Exposed to rain or are e Dusty or are e Subject to high levels of vibration e Ant e The AC adaptor the power supply cord or the e Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is plug has been damaged or level and sure to remain stable Never place it on e If smoke or unusual odor occurs stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces s Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto the unit or e Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with e The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise the unit Also make sure the line voltage at the has become wet or installation matches the input voltage specified on e the AC adaptor s body Other AC adaptors may use a different polarity or be designed for a different voltage so their use could result in damage malfunction or electric shock The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance e In households with small children an adu
205. evel PS PS2 Mode PS PS2 Pitch PS PS2 Fine PS PS2 Pre Delay Bch Bch Bch Bch Bch Bch Bch Bch Cch Cch Cch Cch Cch Cch Cch Cch Cch Cch Cch Cch Cch Cch Cch 00 Off 01 On 20dB 20dB Refer to Refer to 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 00 Off 01 On 00 PH 01 FL 02 HR 03 PS 04 OC 05 PB 06 2CE 07 PAN 08 VB 09 UV OA RT OB SDD 0C HU OD SL OE AR OF SYN 10 BS 11 SEQ 00 4 Stage 01 8 Stage 02 12 Stage 03 Bi Phase Refer to Table 0 100 0 100 0 100 Refer to Table 0 100 0 100 Refer to Table 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 Refer to Table 0 100 0 100 00 1 Voice 01 2 Mono 02 2 Stereo Refer to Table Refer to Table 0 100 0 100 Refer to Table Refer to Table 0 100 C Am B G m 0 100 00 1 Voice 01 2 Mono 02 2 Stereo 00 Fast 01 Medium 02 Slow 03 Mono 24 24 50 50 Refer to Table 0 100 0 100 00 Fast 01 Medium 02 Slow 03 Mono 24 24 50 50 Refer to Table Refer to Refer to Table EQ Middle Frequency Table EQ Middle Q Table EQ Middle Frequency Table EQ Middle Q Rate Step Rate Rate Low Cut HR Harmony Pre Delay HR Harmony Pre Delay Pre Delay Pre Delay Appendices E Oo
206. ext patch when patches are switched Assign Hold does not function if the Assign Source mode is set to Toggle whereby the value is toggled between Min and Max each time the pedal is pressed 1 Press SYSTEM then press PARAMETER lt B so that Assign Hold is displayed 2 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to set Expression Pedal Hold On The Assign status is carried over Example If a patch is switched while the volume is being controlled with the expression pedal the volume of the subsequent patch will take on the value determined by the current pedal position angle If the patch switched to has the expression pedal controlling the wah effect then the volume assumes the value set in the patch and the patch s wah effect is given the value derived from the current pedal position angle Off The Assign status is not carried over Example If a patch is switched while the volume is being controlled with an expression pedal the volume of the subsequent patch is set to the value set in that patch If the expression pedal is operated and that information is transmitted to the GS 10 the volume will change in accord with the pedal s movement 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Setting the Knob Functions Knob Mode This sets the way the values of settings are changed when the control knobs are turned Press SYSTEM then press PARAMETER a B so that Knob Mode is
207. f the USB Composite Device driver is completed a dialog box like the one shown below will appear Add New Hardware Wizard Windows driver file search for the device USB Composite Device Windows is now ready to install the best driver for this device Click Back to select a different driver or click Next to continue Location of driver C NWINDOWSNINFNICHAUSB INF E Cancel 10 Click Finish Next the USB audio device will be detected automatically and the Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box will appear Add New Hardware Wizard This wizard searches for new drivers for USB Audio Device A device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work bech E Cancel 139 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows 11 Click Next and proceed with the installation in the same way as in steps 8 10 When installation of the USB audio device driver is complete a dialog box like the one shown here will appear Add New Hardware Wizard LA USB Audio Device Windows has finished installing the software that your new hardware device requires i Cancel 12 Click Finish Installation of the USB composite device driver and USB audio device driver has been completed 13 Restart Windows Next you need to make the driver settings p 141 140 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows Driver setti
208. f you turn hold On after you pick a note the effect sound will continue even after there is no input signal Effect Level Adjust the volume of the phrase Direct Level Adjust the volume of the direct sound Creating Original Phrases User Phrase In addition to the 30 different prepared phrases you can also create up to ten of your own original phrases User phrases 1 Press FX 2 then press PARAMETER lt B so that FX Select is displayed 2 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to select AR 3 Press FX 2 a number of times to select Phrase then rotate the PATCH V ALUE dial to select User 1 10 4 Press PARAMETER B anumber of times until you have the User Phrase settings screen displayed 5 Press PARAMETER lt B to move the cursor then rotate the PATCH V ALUE dial to set the User phrase User specify the user phrase number IN Sets the note name of the input sound You can also play individual notes on the guitar and let the GS 10 judge the note name STEP Sets the step of the phrase You can also play on the guitar and put the step forward OUT Specify the note name of the output sound The triangle next to the note name indicates the octave One downward pointing triangle indicates a note one octave below the note displayed two triangles indicates a two octave drop One upward pointing triangle indicates a note one octave above the note displayed two triangl
209. from your guitar When the input signal level exceeds this threshold level limiting will be applied Ratio This selects the compression ratio used with signals in excess of the threshold level Release This adjusts the time from when the signal level drops below the threshold until when limiting is removed Tone Adjusts the tone Level Adjusts the volume Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters ENH Enhancer By adding sounds which are out of phase with the direct sound this effect enhances the definition of the sound and pushes it to the forefront Parameter Value Sens 0 100 Freq 800 Hz 10 0 kHz Mix Level 0 100 Sens Sensitivity Adjusts the manner in which the enhancer will be applied relative to the input signals Freq Frequency Adjusts the frequency at which the enhancer effect will begin to be applied The effect will be made apparent in the frequencies above the frequency set here Mix Level Adjusts the amount of phase shifted sound of the range set by Frequency that is to be mixed with the input SG Slow Gear This produces a volume swell effect violin like sound Parameter Value Sens 0 100 Hise Time 0 100 Sens Sensitivity This adjusts the sensitivity of the slow gear When it is set to a lower value the effect of the slow gear can be obtained only with a stronger picking while no effect is obtained with a weaker picking When the value is set higher the eff
210. fy an odd number address for Quick Fx Data SYSTEM MIDI Program Map Parameters for which Size is 2 or higher should not be separated make sure these are sent in the same packet Parameters with Size of 2 or higher transmitted from the specified addresses in sequence from MSB to LSB Output of Quick Fx Name and EFFECT CHAIN is fixed as 12 bytes Table TUNER lt TUNER gt Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 0A TUNER Pitch 00 435Hz 01 436Hz 0A 445Hz 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 01 TUNER Out 00 Mute 01 Bypass Table OUTPUT lt SYSTEM OUTPUT SELECT gt 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 OUTPUT Select 00 LINE PHONES 01 COMBO AMP 02 STACK AMP 03 COMBO Return 04 STACK Return 92 Appendices Table DIRECT PATCH SYSTEM DIRECT PATCH Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 Direct Patch 1 00 00 U001 User 01 01 00 01 01 47 S 00 63 U100 User 00 64 P101 Preset 00 7F P128 Preset 01 00 P129 Preset 01 47 P200 Preset 01 01 00 02 00 00 00 02 00 00 Direct Patch 2 00 00 U001 User 01 01 00 03 01 47 00 63 U100 User 00 64 P101 Preset 00 7F P128 Preset 01 00 P129 Preset 01 47 P200 Preset 01 01 00 04 00 00 00 02 00 00 Direct Patch 3 00 00 U001 User 01 01 00 05 01 47 00 63 U100 User 00 64 P101 Preset 00 7F P128 Preset 01 00 P129 Preset 01 47 P200 Preset 01 01 00 06 00 00
211. g Model Name Type of Equipment Responsible Party Address Telephone For the USA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement GS 10 Guitar Effects System with USB Audio Interface Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 323 890 3700 178 Apparatus containing Lithium batteries ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leveranderen ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten For EU Countries CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion VAROITUS Paristo voi rajahtaa jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin Havit kaytetty paristo Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruks joner valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti For EU Countries C This product c
212. gh Cut Filter Density Effect Level Assign Target Assign Target Min Assign Target Max Assign Source Assign Source Assign Source Assign Source Mode Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer to to to to to to to to to to to to to Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Patch DD Delay Time High Cut Patch Rate Patch Low Cut High Cut Reverb Type Patch Low Cut High Cut Quick Fx Target Target Param Min lt Data lt Target Param Max Target Param Min lt Data lt Target Param Max Refer Refer Act Range Low Act Range High to to Table Table Source Patch Pl Read Only P2 Read Only P3 Read Only P4 Read Only Address H Size H 05 00 Kk kk 05 01 Kk kk 05 02 Kk kk 05 03 Kk kk Tr to 1 t f hd zd X E 00 00 00 00 00 xx 00 01 00 00 00 kk kk e H H 00 0B 00 00 00 COMP xx 01 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 kk kk e H H 01 OBF 00 00 00 OD DS 02 00 00 00 00 02 01 00 00 00 kk kk e H H 02 OBF 00 00 00 PREAMP SP SIM 03 00 00 00 xx 03 01 00 00 kk kk e H H xx 03 0B 00 00 cu EQ 04 00 00 00 04 017 00 00 kk kk e H H 04 OBF 00 00 108 00 00 00
213. gram Map 01 04 11 7F 01 47 B 0 P7128 01 04 12 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 MIDI Program Map 01 04 12 01 01 47 B 1 P 1 01 04 13 7E 00 00 00 02 00 00 MIDI Program Map 01 04 13 7F 01 47 B 1 P7128 Table METER SYSTEM METER Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 01 05 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 OD METER Point Input Effects USB Output Refer to Table METER Point Table USB Setting Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 64 USB Digital Out 00 0 01 2 64 200 02 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 64 Input Level 0 100 02 00 00 02 00 00 00 01 00 01 Direct Monitor 00 Off 01 On 02 00 00 03 00 00 00 01 00 01 Output Mode 00 Stereo L R 01 Effect Direct 02 00 00 04 00 00 00 01 00 01 Driver Mode 00 Standard 01 Advanced 02 00 00 05 00 00 00 01 00 01 Std Drv Func 00 Audio 01 Audio amp MIDI 02 00 00 06 00 00 00 01 00 01 Monitor Cmd 00 Disable 01 Enable 94 Appendices Table HARMONIST lt HARMONIST User Scale Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description Scale 1 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 1 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 1 Db 03 00 00 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 1 D 03 00 00 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 1 Eb 03 00 00 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 1 E 03 00 00 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 1 F 03 00 00 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 1 F 03 00 00 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 1 G 03 00 00 08 00 00 00 01
214. h FreeMIDI settings If other MIDI devices are connected you must turn off the power on all devices and then make FreeMIDI settings according to the following procedure For more on connecting MIDI sound modules refer to the owner s manual for the MIDI sound module you are using Before connecting the USB cable switch the GS 10 s driver mode to Advanced For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 With the power switch turned OFF use the USB cable to connect the GS 10 to your computer Make sure that the GS 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL is set to the lowest setting then switch ON the POWER switch Open the FreeMIDI Applications folder and double click the FreeMIDI Setup icon Free DI Setup 1 45 The first time FreeMIDI is started up a Welcome to FreeMIDI dialog box will appear Click Continue If this is the second or later time select FreeMIDI Preferences from the File menu welcome to FreeMIDI Use FreeMIDI Setup to create a studio configuration to which all FreeMIDI applications have access After clicking Continue you will be presented with Quick Setup You can use this feature to automate the process of creating a studio configuration and to make manual additions very quickly If you would like to use an existing OMS or Performer configuration click Cancel from Quick Setup and choose Dpen from the File menu Continue When OMS is ins
215. h note 118 Appendices Table HR Scale Harmony Scale ER c c gt s Te Te 9 a I9 I5 Taser scale iarmony note pefauit SS O OOOO 2oct Scale 1 14th Scale 2 13th Scale 3 12th Scale 4 11th Scale 5 10th Scale 6 9th Scale 7 loct Scale 8 7th Scale 9 6th Scale 10 5th Scale 11 4th Scale 12 3rd Scale 13 2nd Scale 14 Unison Scale 15 2nd Scale 16 3rd Scale 17 4th Scale 18 5th Scale 19 6th Scale 20 7th Scale 21 loct Scale 22 9th Scale 23 10th Scale 24 11th Scale 25 12th Scale 26 13th Scale 27 14th Scale 28 2oct Scale 29 Table OC Range Data H Gt or Mic Bass 00 1 Gt or Mic 7th string open to lst string 24th fret S Bass 00 7F 127ms 24th fret LoB open to HiC 24th fret 01 00 128ms 01 2 Gt or Mic 01 7F 255ms 7th string open to 1st string 12th fret 02 00 256ms Bass S LoB open to 1st string 19th fret 02 7F 383ms 03 00 384ms 02 3 Gt or Mic 7th string open to lst string open 03 10 400ms Bass 03 11 sixteenth note LoB open to lst string 9th fret 03 12 eighth note triplet 03 13 doted sixteenth note 03 4 Gt or Mic 03 14 eighth note 7th string open to 4th string 2nd fret 03 15 quarter note triplet Bass 03 16 doted eighth note LoB open to 2nd string 2nd fret 03 17 quarter note Table Xover Frequency lt 2CE Xover f Table DD Delay Time DD Delay Time Data H Desc
216. hapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected Remote Ctrl Remote Control Valid Settings Standard Advanced MMC This setting determines the MIDI messages transmitted when a MIDI sequencer or other external MIDI device is controlled with a foot switch or other controller connected to the GS 10 Standard System Realtime messages are transmitted Advanced System Realtime messages and Note messages are transmitted MMC MIDI Machine Control is transmitted For more details refer to Controlling Recorders and Sequencers Remotely from the GS 10 Remote Control p 75 This is set to Advanced when shipped from the factory KnobCtl Out Knob Control Out Valid Settings Off On This setting determines whether or not the information describing the knob adjustments is output as System Exclusive messages Off Knob operations are not output as System Exclusive messages On Knob operations are output as System Exclusive messages This is set to On when shipped from the factory PC Out Program Change Out Valid Settings Off On This setting determines whether or not Program Change messages are output when patches are switched on the GS Off Program Change messages are not output even when patches are switched On Program Change messages are simultaneously output when patches are switched This is set to On when shipped from the factory EXP PDL Out Expression
217. hardware 14 Select Don t search I will choose the driver to install and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Select the device driver you want to install for this hardware et Y O Select the manufacturer and model of your hardware device and then click Nest If you 4 have a disk that contains the driver you want to install click Have Disk Show compatible hardware Model BOSS GS 10 A This driver is not digitally signed Tell me why driver signing is important 15 Make sure that the Model field indicates BOSS GS 10 and click Next Driver installation will begin If the What action do you want Windows to take setting in step 4 was not set to Ignore a Hardware Installation dialog box will appear Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware BOSS GS 10 has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation If the Continue Anyway button appears click the Continue Anyway button to continue with the installation If you are unable to contin
218. hat may cause undesired operation Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada UB0SS BOSS Corporation 03342912 03 8 1N
219. he like whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by law When exchanging audio signals through a digital connection with an external instrument this unit can perform recording without being subject to the restrictions of the Serial Copy Management System SCMS This is because the unit is intended solely for musical production and is designed not to be subject to restrictions as long as it is used to record works such as your own composi tions that do not infringe on the copyrights of others SCMS is a feature that prohibits second generation and later copying through a digital connection It is built into MD recorders and other consumer digital audio equipment as a copyright protection feature Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party We assume no responsi bility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Screen shots in this documents are reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation Windows is known officially as Microsoft Windows operating system Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners OMS is a registered trademark
220. he symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet eme ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING e Before using this unit make sure to read the e Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord instructions below and the Owner s Manual nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards e Do not open or modify in any way the unit or its AC adaptor e This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist e Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts N within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information sheet e Donotallow any objects e g flammable material sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft N duct on top of heat generating equipment or NC drinks etc to pen
221. hich you connect to the Internet use the GS 10 with the following settings If you connect to the Internet via a LAN cable Use while the LAN cable is connected If you connect to the Internet via the internal modem port or are not connected to the Internet In the TCP IP Control Panel set Connect via to PPP After you have made the settings restart your Macintosh Do not use software that accesses the network such as a Web browser at the same time that you are using sequencer software or audio editing software Macintosh Try increasing the Buffer Size in the ASIO Driver control panel The name of the settings dialog box will differ depending on your software If you change the buffer size you must exit the software and then restart it BOSS Roland can make no guarantee of nor provide support regarding the operation of sequencer software and audio editing software made by another manufacturer Please contact the manufacturer of the software you are using 171 Troubleshooting Windows Macintosh Digitally recorded sound is distorted is at the wrong pitch or contains noise J Is the application s sampling frequency set to 44 1 kHz Set the application s sampling frequency to 44 1 KHz Windows Macintosh Playback or recording halts midway through and then becomes impossible LJ Was a heavy processing load experienced while using the GS 10 such as accessing the CD ROM drive or a network
222. ht phaser effect is obtained This is an eight phase effect It is a popular phaser effect 4 Stage 8 Stage This is a twelve phase effect A deep phase effect is obtained This is the phaser with two phase shift cir cuits connected in series This sets the rate of the phaser effect Bi Phase Rate When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER Be to display the Master BPM settings screen Depth Determines the depth of the phaser effect Manual Adjusts the center frequency of the phaser effect Resonance Determines the amount of resonance feedback Increasing the value will emphasize the effect creating a more unusual sound Step Rate This sets the cycle of the step function that changes the rate and depth When it is set to a higher value the change will be finer Set this to Off when not using the Step function When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BP
223. ich the low cut filter begins to take effect This lets you cut the low end component below the set frequency to create a clear distinct low end thereby bringing out the high end of the effect When Flat is selected the low cut filter will have no effect Effect Level This adjusts the volume of the flanger Direct Level This adjusts the volume of the direct sound HR Harmonist Harmonist is an effect where the amount of shifting is adjusted according to an analysis of the guitar input allowing you to create harmonics based on diatonic scales Because of the need to analyze the pitch chords two or more sounds played simultaneously cannot be played Parameter Value Voice 1 Voice 2 Mono 2 Stereo Harm 20ct 2oct Scale1 Scale29 PreDly 0 ms 300 ms BPM A BPM Feedback 0 100 Level 0 100 Key C Am B G m Direct Level 0 100 User Scale User 1 29 DIR C B EFF C B 2 octave Voice This selects the number of voices for the pitch shift sound harmony 1 Voice One voice pitch shifted sound output in monaural 2 Mono Two voice pitch shifted sound HR1 HR2 output in monaural 2 Stereo Two voice pitch shifted sound HR1 HR2 output through left and right channels Harm Harmony This determines the pitch of the sound added to the input sound when you are making a harmony It allows you to set it by up to 2 octaves higher or lower than the input sound When the scale
224. ill be adjusted by the Lo Mid EQ Lo Mid Q Low Middle Q Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the Lo Mid f Higher values will narrow the area Lo Mid EQ Low Middle Equalizer Adjusts the low middle frequency range tone Hi Mid f High Middle Frequency Specify the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the Hi Mid EQ Hi Mid Q High Middle Q Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EO centered at the Hi Mid f Higher values will narrow the area Hi Mid EQ High Middle Equalizer Adjusts the high middle frequency range tone High EQ High Equalizer Adjusts the high frequency range tone Level Adjusts the volume after the equalizer 35 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters FX 1 With FX 1 you can select the effect to be used from the following e PEDAL WAH e AUTO WAH e TONE MODIFY e ADV COMP Advanced Compressor e LIMITER ENHANCER e SLOW GEAR e TREMOLO e DEFRETTER e RING MOD Ring Modulator e FEEDBACKER Parameter Value On Off Off On FX Select PW AW TM ACS LM ENH SG TR DF RM FB On Off Effect On Off Switches the FX 1 effect on off FX Select Effect Select This selects the effect to be used PW Pedal Wah This provides an effect that works like a wah pedal With PW selected the expression pedal connected to the GS 10 can be automatically set to function as a wah pedal
225. ime select New Studio Setup from the File menu Create a New Studio Setup 4 studio setup document is a list of your MIDI devices and cables between them You use it to tell applications what s in your studio Click OK to have OMS automatically locate your MIDI devices and build a new studio setup document AppleTalk AppleTalk is on It is used for connecting your computer to network services such as file servers and printers But it can make MIDI communication less reliable If you choose Turn It Off don t disconnect AppleTalk yet CAUTION OMS may not turn off AppleTalk as reliably as Apple s system software Leave It On Turn It Off The OMS Driver Search dialog box will appear OMS Driver Search OMS will now search for MIDI cards interfaces and software synthesizers These devices are controlled by drivers Click to check the external ports to search for MIDI interfaces O Gi Modem O E Printer 148 you Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to other devices MER This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh 5 Click S
226. imedia Properties dialog box This concludes the procedure for setting the input and output destinations Next set the Windows Volume Control p 144 143 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows B Volume Control setting l Click the Windows Start button and select Programs Accessories Entertainment Volume Control The Volume Control dialog box will apper 83 Volume Control Options Help Wave DW Synth CD Player Balance Balance Balance PES E Ea Volume Volume Volume LJ 2 Raise or lower the slider to adjust the volume of the GS 10 The GS 10 can use the Windows volume control to adjust the output volume Items that can be set CD Player Controls the volume of audio CDs on the internal CD ROM drive of the com CD Audio puter 1 WAVE Controls the volume of sound output from the BOSS GS 10 audio output de vice Digital output and analog output will change eae Controls the volume of the software synthesizer built into Windows SW Synth 1 If the CD playback volume does not change when you adjust this control then change the WAVE volume If you are using Windows 2000 and the CD Player is not displayed check Enable digital music CDs for this CD playback device in Digital CD Playback When playing audio CDs from the computer s internal CD ROM drive or using the GS 10 to play game music p 145 144 MEM If the Volume Control is not in
227. ironment Click the Settings tab place a check mark in the check box for the DMA option and click OK to close the dialog box Depending on your system a DMA Settings dialog box may appear Check the contents and click either OK or Cancel In the System Properties dialog box click OK to close the dialog box Restart your computer Windows Macintosh d gt Try installing more memory Installing more memory will increase the performance of your computer For details on how to install more memory refer to the operation manual for your computer 170 Troubleshooting Windows Macintosh d L x p oue d gt S ei Does your computer satisfy the requirements of the USB standard If you are using a computer such as a computer that you yourself assembled that does not satisfy the electrical requirements of the USB specifications you may experience interruptions in the audio If this occurs you may be able to solve the problem by connecting a USB hub that contains its own power supply On some computers audio playback may be interrupted due to the Power Management settings in the Control Panel The Power Supply Properties that you see when you double click Power Management will differ depending on your computer system One example is given below but you should also refer to the operation manual for your computer Some computers may not have all of the following setting i
228. is set to Scale 1 Scale29 this parameter sets the user scale number to be used PreDly Pre Delay Adjusts the time from when the direct sound is heard until the harmonist sounds are heard Normally you can leave this set at Oms When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the time to twice or four times the time length of the BPM when the set time is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Feedback This adjusts the feedback amount of the harmonist sound Level This adjusts the volume Key Specify the key of the song you are playing By specifying the key you can create harmonies that fit the key of the song The key setting corresponds to the key of the song b as follows Major C F p E A D G 8 LACH P LRNPL _ UUDPLE LDL AI 1 5 515b OKT Ie GGI Wb 2 Uy ER Ph WE Ph OY D d Jl F d Major G D A E B FA 8 T itu In T T4 iu r TU RN E MU AI l 1a MA Che CA eu I M fu i fT OO 1 1 qp _ Tg ON dd _ ___ ______I_I_ _u Minor Em Bm Fim C m Gim Dim Direct Level This adjusts the volume of the direct sound 43 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Creating Harm
229. iver Windows Macintosh Operating system becomes unstable L Operation becomes unstable when the computer is started up with the GS 10 already connected Please start up your computer with the GS 10 disconnected and then connect the GS 10 On a computer that uses a USB keyboard starting up the computer with the GS 10 already connected may cause operation to become unstable In this case start up the computer with the GS 10 disconnected and then connect the GS 10 Windows Macintosh Can t hear sound from the computer L Is it possible that the GS 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL has been placed at 0 turned fully counterclockwise J Have you specified the audio and MIDI data output destination for your operating system You must specify the GS 10 as the audio data output destination for your computer For details on how to make this setting refer to Settings and checking Windows Driver settings p 141 Macintosh OMS settings p 148 FreeMIDI settings p 151 J In your playback software have you specified the audio data output destination For some software such as Cakewalk Music Creator you will need to specify the GS 10 as the output destination for audio data For details on the procedure for making settings refer to the owner s manual for your software 167 Troubleshooting J Are you running multiple applications If multiple applications are running simultaneously an error message ma
230. k 0 100 Effect Level 0 120 DlyTime Delay Time Adjusts the delay time When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the time to twice or four times the time length of the BPM when the set time is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Feedback Feedback refers to returning the delayed signal back into the input of the delay This parameter adjusts the volume that is returned to the input Higher settings will result in more delay repeats Effect Level Adjusts the volume of delay sound HU Humanizer This can create human vowel like sounds Parameter Value Mode Picking Auto Random Vowel 1 a e i 0 u Mode Picking Auto Vowel 2 a e i 0o u Mode Picking Auto Sens 0 100 Mode Picking Rate 0 100 BPM BPM A Depth 0 100 Manual 0 100 Mode Auto Level 0 100 Mode This sets the mode that switches the vowels Picking It changes from vowel 1 to vowel 2 along with the picking The time spent for the change is adjusted with the rate Auto By adjusting the rate and depth two vowels Vowel 1 and Vowel 2 can be switched automatically Random Five vowels a e i 0 u are called out at random by adjusting the rate and depth Vowel 1 This se
231. ks are used solely to identify the equipment whose sound is simulated by BOSS s GS 10 Customizing the COSM Amps You can make three different sets of settings Custom 1 Custom 2 and Custom 3 The sound of any patch that uses Custom 1 2 or 3 will be altered if the custom settings are edited Press the PREAMP SPEAKER On Off switch to display the PREAMP SPEAKER effect screen Press PARAMETER lt B to call up the Type parameter Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to call up Custom 1 Custom 2 or Custom 3 Press PARAMETER Be to show the custom parameters Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to change the setting s value Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as needed Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Parameter Value Type JC Clean TW Clean Crunch VO Lead BG Lead MS1959 Stk Modern Stk Bottom 50 450 Edge 50 50 Bass Freq 50 450 Treble Freq 50 50 Preamp Low 50 450 Preamp High 50 50 Type Selects the basic type of preamp JC Clean This is the sound of the Roland JC 120 TW Clean This models a Fender Twin Reverb This is a crunch sound that can produce Crunch natural distortion This models the drive sound of a veces VOX AC 30TB MESA Boogie combo amp This models the sound input to Input lona Marshall 1959 This models the rhythm channel of a MESA Boogie Dual Rectifier Bottom Adjusts the amount of distortion in the low frequ
232. l Panel and in Control Panel double click the Multimedia icon The Multimedia Properties dialog box will appear 2 Click the Music CD tab and check the Enable digital CD audio for this CD ROM device item Depending on your system playback may still not be possible For details please contact the manufacturer of your computer If you are using a PC card PCMCIA type CD ROM drive playing back WAVE data from a CD ROM or playing an audio CD may cause interrupted sound or possibly no sound at all 145 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh Special Driver and Standard Driver The GS 10 features two operational modes each of which uses a different type of driver with one mode using the special driver on the CD ROM included with the GS 10 and the other mode using the standard Mac OS driver Before installing the drivers you must first switch the GS 10 s driver mode For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 B Special Driver In Special Driver mode allowing audio to be recorded played edited with high quality and stable timing Audio signals can be transferred between the GS 10 and the computer at a resolution of 24 bits and sampling frequencies of 44 1 KHz And in addition to audio you can also control the GS 10 using MIDI messages and connect external MIDI devices and computers Select this mode if you are using an applicati
233. l the software automatically Recommended Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue 13 Make sure that the screen indicates BOSS GS 10 select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next The screen will indicate Please choose your search and installation options 128 Nem In this manual the location of folders and files is given in terms of the file path using as the delimiter For example WinXP_2k SETUPINF EXE indicates the SETUPINF EXE file found in the WinXP_2k folder you Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to other devices yon This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options E Y Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your
234. ld avoid playing chords when using the Bass Simulator Parameter Value Character Loose Tight Level 0 100 Character Bass tone characteristic is set When Loose is selected the sound becomes as if the string gauge was getting thicker Level This adjusts the volume of the bass simulator SEQ Stereo Equalizer This adjusts the tone as a stereo equalizer A parametric type is adopted for the high middle and low middle range Parameter Value Low EQ 20 dB 20 dB Lo Mid f 20 0 Hz 10 0 kHz Lo Mid Q 0 5 16 Lo Mid EQ 20 dB 20 dB Hi Mid f 20 0 Hz 10 0 kHz Hi Mid Q 0 5 16 Hi Mid EQ 20 dB 20 dB Hi EQ 20 dB 20 dB Level 20 dB 20 dB Low EQ Low Equalizer Adjusts the low frequency range tone Lo Mid f Low Middle Frequency Specify the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the Lo Mid EQ Lo Mid Q Low Middle Q Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the Lo Mid f Higher values will narrow the area Lo Mid EQ Low Middle Equalizer Adjusts the Lo Mid f range tone Hi Mid f High Middle Frequency Specify the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the Hi Mid EQ Hi Mid Q High Middle Q Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EO centered at the Hi Mid f Higher values will narrow the area Hi Mid EQ High Middle Equalizer Adjusts the Hi Mid f range tone High EQ High Equalizer Adjusts the high frequency
235. le 14 F 03 00 OD 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 14 G 03 00 OD 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 14 Ab 03 00 OD 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 14 A 03 00 0D 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 14 Bb 03 00 0D OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 14 B Scale 15 03 00 OE 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 OE 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 Db 03 00 OE 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 D 03 00 OE 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 Eb 03 00 OE 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 E 03 00 OE 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 F 03 00 OE 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 F 03 00 OE 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 G 03 00 OE 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 Ab 03 00 OE 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 A 03 00 OE 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 Bb 03 00 OE OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 15 B Scale 16 03 00 OF 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note 03 00 OF 01 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 Db 03 00 OF 02 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 D 03 00 OF 03 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 Eb 03 00 OF 04 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 E 03 00 OF 05 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 F 03 00 OF 06 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 F 03 00 OF 07 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 G 03 00 OF 08 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 Ab 03 00 OF 09 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 A 03 00 OF 0A 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 Bb 03 00 OF OB 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 16 B Scale 17 03 00 10 00 00 00 00 01 00 30 Scale 17 C Refer to Table HR Harmony Note
236. le Patch 00 04 00 00 00 02 00 64 PW Pdl Position 00 00 00 02 00 01 AW Polarity Refer to Table Patch 00 00 00 02 00 64 TM Low 00 00 00 02 00 64 ACS Sustain 00 00 00 02 00 64 LM Attack 00 00 00 02 00 OB ENH Frequency Refer to Table ENH Frequency 00 00 00 02 00 64 SG Rise Time 00 00 00 02 00 71 TR Rate Refer to Table Rate 00 00 00 02 00 64 DF Sensitivity 00 00 00 02 00 64 RM Frequency 00 00 00 02 00 64 FB Rise Time 00 06 00 00 00 02 00 64 PW Level 00 00 00 02 00 64 AW Sensitivity 00 00 00 02 00 64 TM High 00 00 00 02 00 64 ACS Attack 00 00 00 02 00 64 LM Threshold 00 00 00 02 00 64 ENH Mix Level SG 00 00 00 02 00 64 TR Depth 00 00 00 02 00 64 DF Attack 00 00 00 02 00 64 RM Effect Level 00 00 00 02 00 64 FB Rise Time A 00 08 PW 00 00 00 02 00 64 AW Frequency 00 00 00 02 00 64 TM Level 00 00 00 02 00 64 ACS Tone 00 00 00 02 00 11 LM Ratio Refer to Table Ratio ENH SG TR 00 00 00 02 00 64 DF Depth 00 00 00 02 00 64 RM Direct Level 00 00 00 02 00 64 FB F B Level 00 0A PW 00 00 00 02 00 64 AW Peak TM 00 00 00 02 00 64 ACS Level 00 00 00 02 00 64 LM Release ENH SG TR 00 00 00 02 00 64 DF Resonance RM 00 00 00 02 00 64 FB F B Level A 00 OC PW 00 00 00 02 00 71 AW Rate Refer to Table Rate TM ACS 00 00 00 02 00 64 LM Level ENH
237. le Patch Change Patch Change Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description PatchChange 0A 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 Patch No 00 00 U001 OA 00 00 01 01 47 01 47 P200 Table Patch Write Patch Write Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description PatchWrite 0A 01 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 Patch No 00 00 Uu001 0A 01 00 01 00 63 user area 00 63 U100 Table Current Patch Current Patch Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description CurrentPatch 0A 02 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 Patch No 00 00 U001 0A 02 00 01 01 47 i 01 47 P200 Table Patch Initialize Patch Initialize gt Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description PatchInitialize 0A 03 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 Patch 00 none Initialize 01 Patch Initialize Table AMP Ch Copy lt AMP Ch Copy gt Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description AMPChCopy 0A 04 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 AMP Ch Copy 00 A ch 01 B ch 02 C ch Table Quick Fx Number Quick Fx Number Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description QuickSelect 0B 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 FX 1 Quick Fx Number 00 temp 01 POl 02 P02 OB 00 01 00 00 00 00 01 00 COMP Quick Fx Number 0B 00 02 00 00 00 00 01 00 OD DS Quick Fx Number 0B 00 03 00 00 00 00 01 00 PRE Quick Fx Number OB 00 04 00 00 00 00 01 00 EQ Quick Fx Number OB 00 05 00 00 00 00 01 00 FX 2 Quick
238. lect number is 0 un o A Q 00 5 Repeat Step 4 as needed setting patch numbers to their corresponding Program numbers until the Program Change Map is completed 6 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen 73 Chapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected Enabling Disabling the Program Changing Patch Numbers on an Change Map Settings MIDI Map Select External MIDI Device From the GS 10 This setting determines whether patches are switched according to the Program Change Map settings or to the When patches are switched with the G5 10 a Program Change message is transmitted The correspondence default settings between the GS 10 s initial bank and patch numbers and the 1 Press SYSTEM then press PARAMETER ai transmitted Program Change messages is shown in the table B so that MIDI Map Select is displayed SEINE mnm Program Change DER Patch Number Bank Program DOR Select Number U001 1 2 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to select Fix or U002 2 Prog 3 Fix Switches to the patches according to the default settings For more on the default settings refer to Initial Program Change Map settings p 73 Prog 2 Change Map 3 Switches to the patches according to the Program 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen 100 Chapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected Controlling Recorders and Sequencers Remotely from the GS 10
239. lects the first vowel Vowel 1 Vowel 2 Vowel 2 This selects the second vowel Sens Sensitivity This adjusts the sensitivity of the humanizer When it is set to a lower value no effect of the humanizer is obtained with weaker picking while stronger picking produces the effect When it is set to a higher value the effect of the humanizer can be obtained whether the picking is weak or strong Rate This adjusts the cycle for changing the two vowels When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Depth This adjusts the depth of the effect Manual This determines the point where the two vowels are switched When it is set to 50 vowel 1 and vowel 2 are switched in the same length of time When it is set to lower than 50 the time for vowel 1 is shorter When it is set to higher than 50 the time for vowel 1 is longer Level Adjusts the volume 48 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters SL Slicer This consecutively interrupts the sound to create the impression that a rhythm backing phrase is being played Parameter Value Patte
240. ling amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh Installing the ASIO driver You must install the MIDI driver even if you will be using only audio on the GS 10 Be sure to install the MIDI driver before you install the ASIO driver This section explains how to install the ASIO driver that allows the GS 10 to be used by your sequencer software or audio editing software In Special mode the GS 10 cannot play back audio data from the Macintosh s sound manager such as audio CDs and alert sounds The ASIO driver of the GS 10 supports the following audio input output channels e Audio input 24 16 bit 1 stereo ch 2 mono chs e Audio output 24 16bit 1 stereo ch 2 mono chs Here we will explain how to install the ASIO 1 0 16 bit compatible driver If your ASIO compatible software supports ASIO 2 0 or recording playback of 24 bit audio data using the following drivers will provide a higher quality environment ASIO compatible software Driver to use ASIO2 0 reo 24 bit oo GS 10 ASIO1 0 16 bit GS 10 ASIO1 0 24 bit o gt G6 4802016 B eo 690480020 2ibit l From the Driver E Mac OS 9 8 ASIO folder of the CD ROM copy GS 10 ASIO1 0 16bit to the ASIO Drivers folder within the ASIO Drivers folder of the ASIO compatible software you are using e g Cubase VST Logic Audio Digital Performer Metro or SPARK LE GS 10 ASID T U 16bit 2 Start up your ASIO compatible software e g Cubase VST Logic
241. low cut filter will have no effect High Cut High Cut Filter This sets the frequency at which the high cut filter begins to take effect This allows you to get a mild effect sound by cutting the high end component above the set frequency When Flat is selected the high cut filter will have no effect Effect Level Adjusts the volume of the effect sound REVERB This effect adds reverberation to the sound Parameter Value On Off Off On Type Ambience Room Hall 1 Hall 2 Plate Rev Time 0 1 sec 10 0 sec Pre Delay 0 msec 100 msec Low Cut Flat 55 0 Hz 800 Hz High Cut 700 Hz 11 0 kHz Flat Density 0 10 Effect Level 0 100 On Off Effect On Off Turns the REVERB effect on off Type This selects the reverb type Various different simulations of space are offered Simulates an ambience mic off mic placed at a distance from the sound source used in recording and other applications Rather than emphasizing the reverberation this reverb is used to produce a sense of open ness and depth Simulates the reverberation in a small room Provides warm reverberations Simulates the reverberation in a concert Ambience hall Provides clear and spacious reverber ations Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall Provides warm reverberations Simulates plate reverberation a reverb unit that uses the vibration of a metallic plate Provides a metallic sound with a distinct upper range
242. lt should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit e Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it e Do not force the unit s power supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information sheet e DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result N CAUTION The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so their location or position does not interfere with their proper ventilation gt Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor cord when plugging into or unplugging from an Oo outlet or this unit At regular intervals you should unplug the AC adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs Also disconnect the power plug fr
243. mputer to the GS 10 Transmitted MIDI data is output from the GS 10 s MIDI OUT connector BOSS GS 10 Control This transmits MIDI data from the computer to the GS 10 You can control the GS 10 s operations using MIDI data MIDI input devices BOSS GS 10 MIDI IN This accepts MIDI data transmitted from the GS 10 to the computer MIDI data input to the GS 10 s MIDI IN connector is transmitted to the computer BOSS GS 10 MIDI Control This accepts MIDI data transmitted from the GS 10 to the computer Data for the GS 10 s operations and performance data is transmitted to the computer 141 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows B Specifying the audio input output destination Windows XP 2000 Me users l OpenControl Panel Windows XP 1 Click the Windows start button and from the menu that appears select Control Panel Windows 2000 Me 1 Click the Windows Start button and from the menu that appears select Settings Control Panel 2 Open the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties dialog box or in Windows 2000 Me Sounds and Multimedia Properties Windows XP 1 In Pick a category click Sound Speech and Audio Devices 2 In or pick a Control Panel icon click the sounds and Audio Devices icon Windows 2000 Me 1 In Control Panel double click the Sounds and Multimedia icon to open the Sounds and Multimedia Properties dialog box 3 Click the Audio tab 4
244. ncy 03 02 01 04 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Treble Frequency 03 02 01 05 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Preamp Low 03 02 01 06 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Preamp High 03 02 02 00 00 00 00 01 00 06 Custom3 Type 03 02 02 01 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Bottom 03 02 02 02 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Edge 03 02 02 03 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Bass Frequency 03 02 02 04 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Treble Frequency 03 02 02 05 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Preamp Low 03 02 02 06 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom3 Preamp High Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 03 03 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 0A Customl Size 00 5 01 6 02 7 09 14 0A 15 03 03 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 14 Customl Color Low 00 10 01 9 02 8 0A 0 lir 35 14 10 03 03 00 02 00 00 00 01 00 14 Customl Color High 00 10 01 9 02 8 0A 0 Pea 14 10 03 03 00 03 00 00 00 01 00 03 Customl Number 00 x1 01 x2 02 x4 03 x8 03 03 00 04 00 00 00 01 00 01 Customl Cabinet Type 00 Open 01 Close 03 03 01 00 00 00 00 01 00 0A Custom2 Size 03 03 01 01 00 00 00 01 00 14 Custom2 Color Low 03 03 01 02 00 00 00 01 00 14 Custom2 Color High 03 03 01 03 00 00 00 01 00 03 Custom2 Number 03 03 01 04 00 00 00 01 00 01 Custom2 Cabinet Type 102 Appendices Table OD DS OD DS Customize Address H Size H Data H Parameter Description 03 04 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 07 Customl Type 00 OD 1 01 OD 2 02 CRUNCH 03 DS 1 04 DS 2 05 M
245. nd Exclusive Message 89 E Oo D 5 2 le rn Appendices e MIDI Machine Control MMC FOH 7FH 7FH 06H com F7H FOH System Exclusive 7FH ID Number Universal Realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 06H Sub ID 1 Machine Control Command com Sub ID 2 MMC Command F7H EOX End of Exclusive System common com MMC Command that I transmit with GS 10 is following 01H Stop 02H Play 44H 06H 01H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H RESET 06H REC 3 EXCLUSICE COMMUNICATION On the GS 10 exclusive messages can be used as follows Transmit receive GS 10 system patch data The model ID for GS 10 exclusive messages is 00H 63H and you can set up the device ID at 00H 1FH BONE WAY COMMUNICATION Request Data 1 RQ1 11H FOH 41H dev 00H 63H 11H aaH bbH ccH ddH ssH ttH uuH vvH sum F7H FOH Exclusive Status 41H Manufacturer ID Roland dev Device ID Dev 00H 1FH 00H Model ID MSB GS 10 63H Model ID LSB GS 10 11H Command ID RQ1 aaH Address MSB bbH Address ccH Address ddH Address LSB ssH Size MSB ttH Size uuH Size vvH Size LSB sum Checksum F7H EOX End of System Exclusive This message can only be received and is not transmitted from the GS 10 When transmitting large Size values spanning fragmented addresses the data can be transmitted only to those addresses that are contiguous e Data Set 1 DT1 12H FOH 41H dev 00H 63H 12H aa
246. nd G A e A Show All Displays Sound Network Startup Disk Sound Effects f output Input Choose a device for sound output Name L Built in audio controller GS 10 Settings for selected device There are no settings available for the selected device Output volume mf sl v Show volume in menu bar In the Input tab set Choose a device for sound input to GS 10 reo Sound x e Mao a Show All Displays Sound Network Startup Disk sound Effects Output f input Choose a device for sound input Name e a Internal microphone GS 10 Settings for selected device There are no settings available for the selected device Output volume mf gt sl v Show volume in menu bar Cautions when using the GS 10 Before you use your software please note the following points e Select GS 10 in the audio driver setting of your software For details refer to the manual that came with your software Connect the GS 10 to your computer via a USB cable before you start up your sequencer or other software Do not disconnect the USB cable from the GS 10 while your sequencer or other software is running Disconnect the USB cable from the GS 10 only after you have quit your sequencer or other software Leave the Sleep function of your Macintosh turned off The GS 10 will not work in the Classic environment of Mac OS X Use the GS 10 when the Classic environment
247. nding on your application For details refer to the operation manual for your application 163 Troubleshooting If there is no sound or other operational problems occur first check through the following solutions If this does not resolve the problem then contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service station Problems when using the GS 10 Problems with the sound No sound volume too low J Are the built in speakers set to OFF Press SPEAKER ON OFF to ON p 15 i L Are the connection cables broken Try using a different set of connection cables L Is the GS 10 correctly connected to the other devices Check connections with the other devices p 14 LJ Is the connected amp mixer turned off or the volume lowered Check the settings of your amp mixer system L Is the OUTPUT LEVEL knob lowered gt Adjust the OUTPUT LEVEL knob to an appropriate position p 15 L Is Tuner set to On When the volume is set to Mute in the Tuner mode even the direct sound will not be output by setting the Tuner to On p 64 L Is each effect set correctly Use the Meter function p 67 to check the output level of each effect If there is an effect for which the meter does not move check the settings for that effect L Is USB DIG Out Levl set to a low value Adjust the setting to an appropriate value p 78 QJ Is FV Level
248. ne iii 63 IS DUK TINO 63 Source e e TEE 63 TAT ee MU 61 Date et nee uoce iconem DUIS ud EM Ne dRUe 62 EE EE 58 59 Assiohn Hold lla 66 TAO LORI KA LL ARRE RAR NI RA IE 49 Modalita 36 qp que eC 20 AUXINPUT PTT 12 17 AUX INPUT LEVEL iot pb e dms 11 B DASS uuu le ii lil ca i iii 10 21 e 19 BassSiMulatof ilari 52 BUK Ee 71 BUIK TOI HE 71 72 PWpiss ich 65 C CASI iii di nia 24 CHANNEESELECI aria 10 27 Channel Seleti EE 28 COP EE 27 CHORUS clio 11 21 Be EE 34 Combo HE 16 Combo SO UED areata 16 COMP esiliati 10 21 CCOmDIeSSOP Ee 31 Bereet el E 59 COSM e 9 Customize COMMAND ee 55 Overdrive Distortion eere rennen 56 Pedal Wah ella lai 57 3 851 RR RR RA 56 D beretta 40 Eeer eege 24 DEE ae TENES 10 21 pir qe 33 DIGITALOUT RE 12 17 DIRECT PATGELD s rebote aedes Meran 11 18 27 Re 10 IBI A qp 10 21 E Effect Chain EE 24 54 Efece OA EEN 22 EDANE E 39 e D EE 11 EGG IZ EL cs teste tee os etus tns dde du 35 100 EE 11 EXP FREDALZCITE D2 atea 12 Expression Pedale logs mum Mtas 58 F Factory RESET iizra nai 86 TID EE 10 21 Leedb3eker sse UR UU EURO an E e MEL 40 IR 509 5 eege 42 ee gel DEE 59 Foot Volinie a ole lione 54 58 PS lae 11 36 ROLE ETE MEE 11 41 G CAN a 10 21 COO S SPEAK CUS Cou aAA a 15 C E T TETA 19 GUITAR AM POU usi lane 12 16 GUASTA ET 50 GUTTATR BA So csstsattaitatstileasuu i to ra Set a
249. ng Data Saved on a MIDI Sequencer Connect as shown below Set the GS 10 s Device ID to the same number that was used when the data was transmitted to the MIDI sequencer MIDI IN SS SS gt Ile E ELLO LZ gt C gt Di Oss SS MSO PATCH VALUE Ai PREAMP SPEAKER Eet UE GAIN BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL ms UNE CHANNEL SELECT A B EI SUSAN orive Pieve F gen m Oo 5 e E LL C 1 wei m r gg 05 10 DER 9 du O GUITAR BASS For instructions on operating the sequencer refer to the owner s manual for the sequencer you are using Receiving 1 Press SYSTEM then press PARAMETER lt B so that MIDI Bulk Load is displayed 2 Transmit the data from the external MIDI device The following appears in the display when the GS 10 receives the data The following appears in the display when the GS 10 finishes receiving the data At this stage even more data can be received Press EXIT to quit Bulk Load After you press EXIT the Play screen returns to the display 72 Chapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected Setting the Program Change Map m When switching patches using Program Change messages P PATCH VALUE AUXINPUT OUTPUT 2 EAMP SPEAKER tran
250. ng Patches You can return initialize the User patches to their original standard settings PREAMP SPEAKER PATCH VALUE AUXINPUT OUTPUT GAIN BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL f 0N fos d or d r d r e A 4 A A LA KA a PARAMETER USB SPEAKER C CZ LJ C sump EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM CJ DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 4 OI WWW PEDALWAH LIMITER DEFRETTER FX 1 STONE MODIFY SLOW GEAR FEEDOACKER AD COMP TREMOLO GS 1 sua EFFECTS SYSTEM PHASER 2x2 CHORUS with USB AUDIO INTERFACE T HARMONIST Man L mo OCTAVE ROTAR M Y BASS SII PEDALBEND SHORTDELAY STEREO EQ PHONES GUITAR BASS ww 2 4 1 Select the User patch you want to initialize Refer to Patch Change p 18 2 Press WRITE 3 Press PARAMETER B twice The screen for specifying the initialize destination patch number appears in the display User patch to be initialized You can use the PATCH VALUE dial to change the selection of the User patch to be initialized To cancel the initialization press EXIT The Play screen returns to the display 4 Press WRITE The GS 10 switches to the initialized patch and the Play screen returns to the display The tones stored in patches are lost once the initialization is executed Chapter 3 Saving the Tones You Have Created Registering Your Favorite Patches DIRECT PATCH You can register preferred patches to DIRECT P
251. ng is 4 Verify the Install Location and click Install The other currently running applications will exit and installation will continue selected This installation requires your computer to restart after installing this software Click Continue to automatically quit all other running applications Click Cancel to leave vour disks untouched cancer e A dialog box will indicate Installation completed 9 Click Restart to restart your Macintosh 147 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh OMS settings If other MIDI devices are connected you must turn off the power on all devices and then make OMS settings according to the following procedure For more on connecting MIDI sound modules refer to the owner s manual for the MIDI sound module you are using l Before connecting the USB cable switch the GS 10 s driver mode to Advanced For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 2 Withthe power switch turned OFF use the USB cable to connect the GS 10 to your computer 3 Make sure that the GS 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL is set to the lowest setting then switch ON the POWER switch 4 Inthe Opcode folder open the OMS Applications folder and double click the OMS Setup icon DI Setup The first time OMS is started up a Create a New Studio Setup dialog box will appear Click OK If this is the second or later t
252. ngs About the input output devices Audio output devices BOSS GS 10 This sends audio data from the computer to the GS 10 This is the setting you will normally use such as when using the GS 10 with Media Player You will also select this setting when using an application such as SONAR in WDM driver mode or when using a DirectSound application MME BOSS GS 10 Out Windows XP 2000 only This sends audio data from the computer to the GS 10 Use this setting if you want to use 24 bit audio with an application that does not have a WDM driver mode or does not support ASIO such as Cool Edit Audio input devices BOSS GS 10 This receives audio data sent by the GS 10 to the computer This is the setting you will normally use You will also select this setting when using an application such as SONAR in WDM driver mode MME BOSS GS 10 In Windows XP 2000 only This receives audio data sent by the GS 10 to the computer Use this setting if you want to use 24 bit audio with an application that does not have a WDM driver mode or does not support ASIO such as Cool Edit ASIO device If you are using the GS 10 with an ASIO compatible application such as Cubase select BOSS GS 10 as the ASIO setting on your application To prevent an audio oscillation loop or double monitoring turn monitoring Off in your application or use ASIO Direct Monitor MIDI output devices BOSS GS 10 MIDI OUT This transmits MIDI data from the co
253. o change the setting s value 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as needed 7 To use other Assigns repeat Steps 2 6 Even when using this procedure the settings selected in Step 6 are maintained as is and carried over to the Quick Settings for the next effect 8 To save the settings use the Write procedure p 25 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Target This sets the parameter to be affected The parameters that you can select as the target are shown below Effect On Off Effects Parameters Switches on off the effect indicated in the screen and controls the effect s parameters MST Patch Level Controls the patch volume MST Master BPM Controls the Master BPM TUNER On Off Turns the tuner on and off Master BPM Tap Controls the Master BPM using tap input Delay Time Tap Controls the delay time using tap input Remote Strt Stop Starts and stops the recorder sequencer or other such device connected to the GS 10 Patch Level Inc Increases the patch volume level in increments of 10 units Patch Level Inc2 Increases the patch volume level in increments of 20 units Patch Level Dec Decreases the patch volume level in increments of 10 units Patch Level Dec2 Decreases the patch volume level in increments of 20 units CH Select Inc Switches the preamp channel in the following order A B Ced CH Select Dec Switches the preamp channel in the following order C B sid gt C
254. o the received patch number and the Current Patch is output Current Patch When received Current patch number is transmitted only when ROI is received Patch When transmitted DATA 01H is transmitted Initialize When received Initial value is set if DATA 01H is received Data size is fixed at 1 byte AMP Ch Copy When transmitted Copy destination amp channel is transmitted When received Copy destination amp channel is received Data size is fixed at 1 byte Quick Fx Number When transmitted Quick Fx number is transmitted DATA Quick Fx Number When received Quick Fx number is changed DATA Quick Fx Number Data size is fixed at 1 byte Quick Fx Count Number of Quick Fx in each Effect block Request size is fixed at 1 byte set at 00 00 00 01 TUNER METER Mode 01H TUNER Mode 02H METER Mode 00H exit Play Mode In TUNER mode Pitch Note data transmitted n METER mode METER POINT data transmitted During TAP operations Delay Time Delay Time Fine transmitted when setting BPM Master BPM transmitted he GS 10 can use two methods of communication Individual Parameter and Bulk Dump Bulk data can be received when the Bulk Load Ready function is accessed in MIDI Bulk Load screen System mode Although individual data can be received at any time be sure to appropriately describe the value for one parameter in one packet FO F7 Do not use an address appended with as the first address Do not speci
255. of Opcode Systems Inc FreeMIDI is a trademark of Mark of the Unicorn Inc USING THE UNIT SAFELY 2 IMPORTANT NOTES 00000000000000004 Main Features DEENS Panel Descriptions 10 Front Panielz uen eic td on rd Ceiba DE UE 10 Rearbanebl aa aiar a tid E aU 12 Signal He 13 Chapter 1 Playing Sounds 14 Making the Connections eee 14 Turning On the E 15 Turpis OM tlie POW eet 15 Using the GS 10 s Speakers 15 Adjusting the Output Level 15 Setting Output Device Amps OUTPUT SELECT cucire 16 Connecting Audio Devices to the AUX INPUT Jack 17 Using the Digital Output eere 17 Chapter 2 Creating Your Own Favorite Tones Paiches ies coso es eoseseveshseveessveeseecssees 10 Whatis a Eeer pesti satis ces 18 How to Select Patches Patch Change 18 About the Display Indication 18 If the Patch Does Not Switch 18 Selecting the Input INPUT SELECT 19 Setting the Mic Input Level MIC GAIN 20 Adjusting the Tones with the Knobs 21 Turning the Effect On and Off 22 Setting the Effects Simply QUICK FX
256. of settings PARAMETER Buttons Press to select parameters To jump to the main parameters hold down one of these buttons while you press the other With items for which there aren t that many parameters the GS 10 jumps to the last or initial parameter 17 18 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 EXIT Button Use this to undo operations WRITE Button Press to store settings AUX INPUT LEVEL Knob Adjusts the volume of the input from the AUX INPUT jack Setting the input level too high may result in oscillation OUTPUT LEVEL Knob Adjusts the GS 10 s output level and the unit s speaker volume USB Button p 78 Used when making USB related settings The indicator lights when the GS 10 is connected to your computer SPEAKER ON OFF Button p 15 Switches the GS 10 s speakers on and off METER Button p 67 Press to use the meter function SYSTEM Button Use for making settings for the GS 10 s overall operating environment TUNER Button p 64 Press to use the tuner function DIRECT PATCH Button p 18 Allows you to directly call up your favorite patches registered in the GS 10 PHONES Jack Connect the stereo headphones here GUITAR BASS Jack The guitar or bass is connected here Panel Descriptions Rear Panel ING TWO CON TIONS 1 THIS DEVICE M _ MIDI AUX OU PUT EC EXP FEDAL DIGITAL be E INPUT P OUT C1 OUT FOWER 2s di
257. om the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be N placed so they are out of the reach of children the unit Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on S Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with d wet hands when plugging into or unplugging CD from an outlet or this unit Before moving the unit disconnect the AC adaptor and all cords coming from external devices Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet IMPORTANT NOTES In addition to the items listed under USING THE UNIT SAFELY on page 2 3 please read and observe the following Power Supply e Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system e The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of consecutive use This is normal and is not a cause for concern e Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Placement
258. om the start to the end of transmission Displayed Data Transmitted System Parameters Harmonist scales Auto Riff phrases and Preamp Over SISI drive Distortion and Wah Custom Edit parameter settings U001 U100 Settings for Patch Number U001 through U100 Temp 1m for the patch the is currently called Making the Connections When Saving to a MIDI Sequencer Connect as shown in the figure below and put the sequencer in the state where it is ready to receive Exclusive messages EXT WRITE TUNER GS 10 GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM with USB AUDIO INTERFACE Gry GUITAR BASS m eeu mon TI ms mm cas For instructions on operating the sequencer refer to the owner s manual for the sequencer you are using When Transmitting Data to Another GS 10 Connect as shown in the figure below and match the Device ID for the transmitting and receiving devices GUITAR EFFECTS SYSTEM with USB AUDIO INTERFACE W MIDI IN lt E MIDI OUT SS SS lie EE Se gt C DD II II C 2 C ed gt gt wie gt gt EH PEAI ON OFF Tume EXT WRITE DOO e C DIRI la
259. omplies with the requirements of European Directive 89 336 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference t
260. on When connecting to a bass amp MS1959 II a Marshall 1959 Stack Amp or Stack Return This models the sound of a Marshall 1959 MOSSA with Inputs I and II connected in parallel This models the sound of a Marshall with a modified midrange boost Power Stack This provides the sound of a stack amp with active type tone circuitry R FIER Red This models the lead channel of a MESA Boogie Dual Rectifier This models the rhythm channel of a EES MESA Boogie Dual Rectifier This models a MESA Boogie Rectifier with R FIER Vint VINTAGE SW on This models a Hughes amp Kettner Triamp T AMP Clean AMPI This models a Hughes amp Kettner Triamp T AMP Crunch AMP This models a Hughes amp Kettner Triamp T AMP Lead AMP3 SLDN This models a Soldano SLO 100 Drive Stack This is a drive sound with high gain Bass HiGain 29 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters When CUSTOM 1 3 is selected for Type You can set the following parameters when Type is set to CUSTOM I Customizing the COSM Amps p 55 EDIT CUSTOM PRE 1 3 Parameter Value Type JC Clean TW Clean Crunch VO Lead BG Lead MS1959 Stk Modern Stk Bottom 50 50 Edge 50 50 Bass Freq 50 50 Treble Freq 50 50 Preamp Low 50 450 Preamp High 50 50 Gain Adjusts the distortion of the amp Bass Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range Middle Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range Treble Adjusts the
261. on and or damage to the unit Use a cable from Roland to make the connection If using some other make of connection cable please note the following precautions e Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impossible to hear For infor mation on cable specifications contact the manufac turer of the cable Handling CD ROMs Unauthorized duplication reproduction hiring and lending prohibited Before you open the included CD ROM you must read the license agreement Opening the CD ROM will be taken to mean your acceptance of the license agreement Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or contents of this package are subject to change without prior notice DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result Copyright e Unauthorized recording distribution sale lending public performance broadcasting or the like in whole or in part of a work musical composition video broadcast public performance or t
262. on that allows high quality audio recording playback editing such as an application that supports 24 bit audio or an ASIO compatible application e g Cubase VST Logic Audio or Metro Installing the special driver p 146 B Standard Driver In Standard Driver mode audio signals are transferred between the GS 10 and the computer at a resolution of 16 bits and sampling frequencies of 44 1 KHz Select this mode if you are using an application that uses Mac OS s own functionality such as an application that uses the computer s CD ROM drive to play back CD audio or an application that uses the software synthesizer included with Mac OS Installing the OS standard driver p 157 f you want to use MIDI use special driver mode Installing the special driver The installation procedure will differ depending on your system Please proceed to one of the following sections depending on the system you use e Mac OS 9 8 users p 146 Mac OS X users fef p 155 B Mac OS 9 8 users If using the unit in the Special driver mode use either OMS or FreeMIDI as the MIDI driver The included GS 10 driver is an add on module for using the GS 10 with OMS or FreeMIDI MEMO OMS can be found in the OMS 2 3 8 E folder of the CD ROM If you would like to learn more about OMS refer to OMS 2 3 Mac pdf in the OMS 2 3 8E folder of the CD ROM In order to read OMS_2
263. one position Center simulates the condition that the microphone is set in the middle of the speaker cone 1 10 means that the microphone is moved away from the center of the speaker cone Mic Level Adjusts the volume of the microphone Direct Level Adjusts the volume of the direct sound COMP Compressor This is an effect that produces a long sustain by evening out the volume level of the input signal You can also use it as a limiter to suppress only the sound peaks and prevent distortion Parameter Value On Off Off On Sustain 0 100 Level 0 100 On Off Effect On Off Turns the COMP effect on off Sustain Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Level Adjusts the volume 31 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters OD DS Overdrive Distortion This effect distorts the sound to create long sustain It provides 22 types of distortion and three different custom settings Parameter Value On Off Off On Type refer to below Drive 0 100 Bass 50 50 Treble 50 50 Effect Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 On Off Effect On Off Turns the OD DS effect on off Type Selects the type of distortion Blues OD This is a crunch sound of the BOSS BD 2 This is the high gain overdrive sound of Turbo OD oe BOSS OD 2 Booster This is a booster that works very well with COSM amps MODA This
264. onist Scales User Scale When Harmony is set to any value from 2oct to 2oct and the harmony does not sound the way you intend use a User scale You can set any of 29 different User scales 1 Press FX 2 then press PARAMETER lt B so that FX Select is displayed 2 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to select HR 3 Press PARAMETER B to select HR1 Harm or HR2 Harm then rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to select a setting from Scale 1 29 4 Press PARAMETER B gt a number of times so that the User scale settings screen is displayed 5 Press PARAMETER B to move the cursor then rotate the PATCH V ALUE dial to set the User scale User You can change the number of the user scale DIR Direct Sets the note name of the input sound You can also play individual notes on the guitar and let the GS 10 interpret the note name EFF Effect Sets the note name of the output sound The triangle next to the note name indicates the octave One downward pointing triangle indicates a note one octave below the note displayed two triangles indicates a two octave drop One upward pointing triangle indicates a note one octave above the note displayed two triangles indicates a two octave rise PS Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves Parameter Value Voice 1 Voice 2 Mono 2 Stereo Mod
265. oot switch set the GS 10 so that SYS CTL1 Func is indicated if connecting two foot switches set the GS 10 so that SYS CTL1 Func or SYS CTL2 Func is indicated for the corresponding foot switch Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to select Remote Strt Stop For more on SYS CTL1 Func or SYS CTL2 Func refer to p 59 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Each time the foot switch is pressed it alternately sends Start and Stop assigning functions are transmitted in addition to the Standard messages Use the software to set the operations to be performed by means of these Note messages Neither FA nor FC can be transmitted consecutively Note messages are transmitted over the selected transmission channel p 69 When set to MMC MIDI Machine Control is transmitted Chapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected Settings Example When Using SONAR 2 0 The following settings allow you to control the sequencer Play Stop Reset and Record functions from the GS 10 With SONAR 2 0 these are set according to note names Keys rather than Note messages 1 From the Options menu choose MIDI Devices 14 In the Bindings area set Key to G 1 2 Inthe MIDI Devices dialog box select BOSS GS 15 In the Function area select Transport Record 10 Control as both the Inputs and Outputs 16 Click the Bind button 3 From the Options menu choose Key Bindings
266. or MST Patch Level specified as an assign Target Move the controller to which it is assigned L Is the Dir Monitor p 79 set to OFF Note that turning off this setting will stop the sounds from being output when the application is not recording or if its settings are not correctly made Set to ON 164 Sound from devices connected to the INPUT jack is not heard in the headphones _1 Isthe AUX INPUT LEVEL raised to suitable level Adjust the volume level J Is the Dir Monitor p 79 set to OFF Note that turning off this setting will stop the sounds from being output when the application is not recording or if its settings are not correctly made Set to ON The volume level of the instrument connected to INPUT is too low L Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor Usea connection cable that does not contain a resistor L Is the AUX INPUT LEVEL knob lowered Adjust the AUX INPUT LEVEL knob to an appropriate position p 17 LJ Is USB Input Level set to a low value Adjust the setting to an appropriate value p 76 3 Is Mic Gain set to a low value Adjust the setting to an appropriate value p 20 The sound of a device connected to the AUX INPUT jack is distorted Ifyou are inputting sound through the AUX IN jacks use AUX INPUT LEVEL knob of the GS 10 to lower the input level The sound of a device connected to the MIC INPU
267. ou are unable to install the driver Windows Find new hardware wizard does not execute automatically Windows Find new hardware wizard ends before the process is completed J It may take about 15 seconds or more after the USB cable is connected for the GS 10 to be detected L Is the USB cable connected correctly Make sure that the GS 10 and your computer are correctly connected via a USB cable LJ Is USB enabled on your computer Refer to the operation manual for your computer and make sure that USB is enabled 165 Troubleshooting L L i L m re P d 9 It has been found that in some cases not all of the Windows 98 files required to support audio via USB are installed when a computer is shipped Please contact the manufacturer of your computer Does your computer meet the USB specifications If you are using a computer that does not fulfill the electrical requirements of the USB specifications operation may be unstable In this case you may be able to solve the problem by connecting a USB hub Does Unknown device appear for Other device or Universal serial bus controller Use the following procedure to delete Other device Universal Serial Bus Controller Unknown device and then restart your computer In the Windows Control Panel double click System The System Properties dialog box will appear Click the Device Manager tab Double click Other
268. p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen 46 Chapter 4 Introduction to Effects and Parameters Depth This adjusts the depth of the vibrato Trigger This selects on off of the vibrato tis assumed that this parameter will be assigned p 60 to the foot switch Rise Time This sets the time passing from the moment the trigger is turned on until the set vibrato is obtained UV Uni V Although this resembles a phaser effect it also provides a unique undulation that you can t get with a regular phaser Parameter Value Hate 0 100 BPM BPM A Depth 0 100 Level 0 100 Rate Adjusts the rate of the Uni V effect When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Depth Adjusts the depth of the Uni V effect Level Adjusts the volume RT Rotary This produces an effect like the sound of
269. plied to the wah tone Range Low Selects the tone produced when the pedal is back Range High Selects the tone produced when the pedal is forward Presence Adjusts the tonal quality of the wah effect 57 Chapter 6 Setting the External Pedal Functions This section describes the settings required to use an expression pedal or foot switch connected to the EXP PEDAL CTL17 jack on the rear panel If you want the external pedal to have the same function at all times In situations such as when you want to use the expression pedal only as a volume pedal you can set the external pedal function as a global setting common to the GS 10 overall JE Expression Pedal Function refer to right Control 1 2 Function p 59 If you want the external pedal function to change with the patch If you want the external pedal to function differently depending on the patch perhaps using the expression pedal to change the volume in one patch but using it to adjust the amount of overdrive distortion in another patch then use the Assign settings In each patch you can set up to eight different types Assign numbers determining which parameter is to be controlled by a particular controller In addition you can use the Assign function to set controllers using Control Change messages from external MIDI devices IER Assign p 60 When using an expression pedal or foot switch with the Assign settings set the
270. plug from being disconnected Panel Descriptions Signal Flow Computer GS 10 OUT CONTROL IN CONTROL OUT MIDI OUT Recorder Expression Pedal N Foot Switch EXP CTL 1 2 Guitar Bass gt Q INPUT IC d SELECT comp X ts CONTROL V MULTI EFFECTS Speaker Headphones gt A D gt Audio signal Control or MIDI signal Chapter 1 Playing Sounds Making the Connections Mic E E Computer THIS DEVICE COMPLIES 15 OF THE FCC AND 2 THIS DEVICE MU ANY INTERFEF O INPUT_ 9 d 3 OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVICE MAY SE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE RECEIVED INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION ie OUTPUT Ba EXP PEDAL DIGITAL USB PUT OUT CTL 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 9 g U e per 3 AC Adaptor SBD AI TUS MEETS ALL REQUIREMENTS NADI ER CE CAUSING EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS d Tested To Comply B RC H e A 101 MB ca CLASSE B RESPECTE series Gl WD MIDI POWER a fia Ze With FCC Standa NCES T SUR LE MAT RIEL SROULLEUR DU CANADA FOR HOME OR OFFICE US l e S S 5 1000000 Roland EV 5 Foot Switch FS 5U etc Expression Pedal Stereo Headphones Mixer Roland EV 5 etc PHONES GUITAR BAS
271. quencies Low Adjusts low frequency tone High Adjusts the high frequency tone Customizing Pedal Wah You can make three different sets of settings Custom 1 Custom 2 and Custom 3 The sound of any patch that uses Custom 1 2 or 3 will be altered if the custom settings are edited 1 Press the FX 1 On Off switch to display the FX 1 effect screen 2 Press PARAMETER lt B to call up the FX Select parameter then select PW with the PATCH VALUE dial 3 Press PARAMETER a B to call up the Type parameter 4 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to call up Custom 1 Custom 2 or Custom 3 5 Press PARAMETER B to show the custom parameters 6 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to change the setting s value 7 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as needed 8 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Parameter value Type CRY WAH VO WAH Fat WAH Light WAH 7String WAH Q 50 50 Range Low 50 50 Range High 50 450 Presence 50 450 Type Selects the basic type of wah This models the sound of the CRY BABY wah pedal popular in the 70s This models the sound of the VOX V846 CRY WAH VO WAH Fat WAH This a wah sound featuring a bold tone Light WAH This wah has a refined smooth sound 7String WAH Wah featuring a broader range of varia tions for the seven string guitar Q Adjusts the amount of characteristic effect ap
272. r Windows Windows 98 users l Click the Windows Start button and from the menu that appears select Settings Control Panel The Control Panel will appear 2 InControl Panel double click the Multimedia icon 3 Click the Audio tab Multimedia Properties 2 x Audio video MIDI CD Music Devices Playback d Preferred device BOSS GS 10 Recording GG Preferred device ska Boss GS 10 Use only preferred devices r Cancel Apply 4 Specify the Preferred device Click the Playback field and Recording field make the following selections from the list that appears and click Apply D Special driver mode Standard driver mode Playback BOSS GS 10 USB Audio Device Recording BOSS GS 10 USB Audio Device 5 Click the MIDI tab Multimedia Properties 2 x Audio Video MIDI co Music Devices MIDI output Single instrument Boss GS 10 MIDI OUT BOSS GS 10 Control Microsoft GS Wavetable Sw Synth Custom configuration Add New Instrument Cancel Apply 6 Set MIDI output Select Single instrument and choose one of the following from the list that appears and click Apply Special driver mode Standard driver mode MIDI cannot be handled when using Standard BOSS GS 10 MIDI OUT Driver mode MIDI in Standard Driver Mode p 80 MIDI sound playback 7 Click OK to close the Mult
273. r destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation If the Continue Anyway button appears click the Continue Anyway button to continue with the installation The Found New Hardware Wizard will appear Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for O BOSS GS 10 A The hardware you installed will not work until you restart your computer Click Finish to close the wizard 18 Verify that BOSS GS 10 is displayed and click Finish Wait until Found New Hardware appears near the taskbar When driver installation has been completed the System Settings Change dialog box will appear 19 Click Yes Windows will restart automatically Next you need to make the driver settings p 141 130 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows Windows 2000 wot l with the GS 10 disconnected start up Windows If the GS 10 is already Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse if used connected to your computer and a message of Add New 2 Click the Windows Start button and from the menu that appears select Manda Pardi Settings Control Panel In Control Panel double cli
274. ription Data H Description 00 100Hz 00 Oms 01 125Hz 01 20ms 02 160Hz S 03 200Hz 59 1780ms 04 250Hz 5A sixteenth note 05 315Hz 5B eighth note triplet 06 400Hz 5C doted sixteenth note 07 500Hz 5D eighth note 08 630Hz 5E quarter note triplet 09 800Hz 5F doted eighth note 0A 1 00kHz 60 quarter note 0B 1 25kHz 61 half note triplet 0c 1 60kHz 62 doted quarter note OD 2 00kHz 63 half note OE 2 50kHz 64 whole note triplet OF 3 15kHz 65 doted half note 10 4 00kHz 66 whole note Table Reverb Type lt RV Type gt Data H Description gt EE el 00 Ambience E 01 Room D 02 Halll 03 Hall2 e 04 Plate A o n 119 Appendices Table Chain Effect Chain 00 FX 1 01 Compressor 02 Overdrive Distortion 03 Preamp Speaker Simulator 04 Equalizer 05 FX 2 06 Delay 07 Chorus 08 Reverb 09 Noise Suppressor 0A Foot Volume 0B USB Table Name Name Edit N O ao M MMH NIN va Is Bs CO gt Ze D F D Si ei Cr mOdOG SD Om oO RODOp Dei M II Ave e 90 10YUI iS CN I Oc On CH d Oo Ed WANK MS d GrmHOmO OD SS DO OO DO Table Target Patch Assign Target gt Description FX1 0n Off FX1 FX Select PW Type PW Pdl Position PW Level AW Mode AW Polarity AW Sensitivity AW Frequency AW Peak AW Rate AW Depth AW Level TM Type TM Low TM High TM Level ACS Type ACS Sustain ACS Attack ACS Tone ACS Level LM Type LM Attack LM Threshold LM Ratio LM Release
275. rn P1 P20 Hate 0 100 BPM BPM A Trigger Sens 0 100 Pattern Select the slice pattern that will be used to cut the sound Rate Adjust the rate at which the sound will be cut When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the Master BPM p 54 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the cycle to one half or one fourth of the BPM when the set cycle rate is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER Be to display the Master BPM settings screen Trigger Sens Trigger Sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity of triggering With low settings of this parameter softly picked notes will not retrigger the phrase De the phrase will continue playing but strongly picked notes will retrigger the phrase so that it will playback from the beginning With high settings of this parameter the phrase will be retriggered even by softly picked notes AR Auto Riff This allows you to automatically produce a phrase simply by picking a single note This can be used to easily play extremely rapid phrases Reception of large amounts of MIDI data while Auto Riff is playing may result in disturbances in the sound Parameter Value Phrase Preset1 Preset30 User1 User10 Loop Off On Tempo 0 100 BPM BPM A Sens 0 100 Key C Am B G m Phrase Preset Attack 0 100 Hold Off On Effect
276. roduction to Effects and Parameters ACS Advanced Compressor This is an effect that produces a long sustain by evening out the volume level of the input signal You can also use it as a limiter to suppress only the sound peaks and prevent distortion Parameter Value Type Stereo Comp BOSS Comp D Comp Sustain 0 100 Attack 0 100 Tone 50 50 Level 0 100 Type Selects the compressor type Stereo Comp This selects a stereo compressor BOSS Comp This models a BOSS CS 3 This models a MXR DynaComp Sustain Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Attack Adjusts the strength of the picking attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Tone Adjusts the tone Level Adjusts the volume LM Limiter The limiter attenuates loud input levels to prevent distortion Parameter Value Type Stereo LM Rack 160D Vtg Hack U Attack 0 100 Threshold 0 100 Ratio 1 1 00 1 Release 0 100 Level 0 100 Type Selects the limiter type Stereo LM This selects a stereo limiter Rack 160D This models a dbx 160X Vtg Rack U This models a UREI 1178 Attack Adjusts the strength of the picking attack when the strings are played Higher values result in s sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Threshold Adjust this as appropriate for the input signal
277. rrect Click Troubleshoot if this list is incomplete Click Customize to edit details of your setup Click Cancel to abort OMS setup DI For other connected MIDI devices as well add a check mark to the port s you want to use For details on settings refer to the manual that came with your MIDI device BOSS Roland can provide no guarantees or support regarding the operation of MIDI device made by another company Please contact the manufacturer of your MIDI device 8 Input the desired file name and click Save 9 In the Studio Setup window change the device name indicating the MIDI device connected to the GS 10 as follows Click the device name and you will be able to edit it Port 1 GS 10 MIDI IN OUT Port 2 GS 10 CONTROL O My Studio Setup E E BOSS GS 10 IDO Chs 1 16 RI IAC Driver Studio Patches pgm chg geo QuickTime Music ect BOSS GS 10 GS 10 MIDI IN OUT WW IPSE EE a 10 From the File menu select Save 149 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh 11 From the Edit menu select OMS MIDI Setup In the OMS MIDI Setup dialog box that appears check Run MIDI in background and click OK OMS MIDI Setup External ports to use amp Modem Printer 4 Run MIDI in background When Run MIDI In background is checked OMS will retain
278. rs may cause noise to be heard during audio playback Use the following procedure to turn the graphic accelerator Off In the Windows Control Panel double click Display to open the Display Properties dialog box and click the Settings tab Click Advanced and in the properties that appear click the Performance tab For Windows XP click Advanced and then click the Troubleshoot tab For Windows 2000 click Advanced and then click the Troubleshooting tab Set the Hardware acceleration slider to None and click OK 4 5 In the Display Properties dialog box click OK to close the dialog box Restart your computer Windows d In Windows XP make the settings that enable background processing Make these settings so that audio processing can be performed smoothly Make settings as described in Make Windows XP settings to enable background processing p 169 Windows o 7 Try using the following procedure to change your disk drive settings The following setting item may not exist on some computers In the Windows Control Panel double click System Click the Device Manager tab Double click Disk Drives to see the list of devices From the list select GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE and click Properties to access the GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE Properties dialog box In the field of GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE there will be a number that differs depending on your computing env
279. s turned to the right PREAMP LEVEL Adjusts the preamp volume level The volume increases as the knob is turned to the right COMP Compressor SUSTAIN Adjusts the compressor s sustain effect an effect that keeps the sound playing The effect is strengthened as the knob is turned to the right OD DS Overdrive Distortion DRIVE Adjusts the degree of overdrive or distortion The distortion appears stronger as the knob is turned to the right OD DS Overdrive Distortion LEVEL Adjusts the overdrive distortion volume level The volume increases as the knob is turned to the right DELAY FEEDBACK Adjusts the number of times the delay is repeated The number of repeats increases as the knob is turned to the right DELAY LEVEL Adjusts the volume level of the delay sound The delay sound increases as the knob is turned to the right CHORUS LEVEL Adjusts the volume level of the chorus sound The chorus sound increases as the knob is turned to the right REVERB LEVEL Adjusts the volume level of the reverb sound The reverb sound increases as the knob is turned to the right 21 Chapter 2 Creating Your Own Favorite Tones Patches Turning the Effect On and Off The GS 10 s internal effects are switched on and off with button controls The indicator for an effect s ON OFF button lights up when the effect is enabled PATCH VALUE AUXINPUT OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL PAR
280. sage before installing an unsigned File C Block Prevent installation of unsigned files Administrator option Je Apply setting as system default cma 4 the File signature verification is set to Ignore and click OK If currently set to Warn or Block set it to Ignore here then after installing the driver restore the original setting 9 Click OK to close the System Properties dialog box Exitall currently running software applications Also close any open windows If you are using virus checking or similar software be sure to exit it as well 7 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of your computer 8 Click the Windows start button From the menu that appears select Run Open the Run dialog box 131 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows 9 Inthe dialog box that appears input the following into the Open field and MEMO click OK In this manual the location of D DRIVER USB_XP2k SETUPINF EXE folders and files is given in The drive name D may be different for your system Specify the drive name of your CD ROM drive terms of the file path using as the delimiter For example LT ais WinXP_2k SETUPINE EXE indicates the SETUPINF EXE T Type the name of a program folder document or file found in the WinXP 2k Internet resource and Windows will open it For vou folder Open DADRIVERUSE_KPZk SETUPINF EXE Cancel Browse
281. smit both digital Adju sting the Recording Level audio signals and MIDI messages between the GS 10 and your computer Output Level This requires installation of a USB driver on your computer This adjusts the volume level of the digital audio output to so that it can work with the GS 10 s driver mode settings the USB and DIGITAL OUT connectors For instructions on installing the driver please read Installing amp Setup the USB Driver p 125 I Press USB 2 Press PARAMETER lt 4 B so that Out Levl is displayed 3 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to set the output level 4 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Adjusting the Playback Volume Level Input Level mav nsaan BOSS Corporation This adjusts the volume level of the digital audio input from the USB connector Driver Mode 1 Press USB The GS 10 features two operational modes one mode that 2 Press PARAMETER gt so that Input uses the special driver on the CD ROM included with the Level is displayed GS 10 and another mode that uses the operating system s Windows Mac OS standard drivers iE The special driver provides high quality sound and stable LUE 1 E L3 timing for audio recording playback and editing m h 10 with In addition the driver enables you to control t hi GS 10 wit 3 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to s
282. smitted by an external MIDI device you can freely set CO c ME Cp cs 2 E 7A N 7 N d Fre pe A PW the correspondence between Program Change messages Oi ree rn X e i received by the GS 10 and the patches to be switched toin aa L g OC the Program Change Map ou C CH NM P Initial Program Change Map Settings m Liga sorelle The Program Change Map set at the factory is shown below 9 Dich PHONES GUITAR BASS ww Program Change Bank Program Patch Number 6 1 Select Number U001 1 Press SYSTEM then press PARAMETER ai 2 U002 B so that MIDI Map Select is displayed Con 99 U099 100 U100 2 Rotate the PATCH V ALUE dial to select Program meee You cannot set the Program Change Map when Fix is 102 U100 selected it is not displayed 128 U100 See below for more on MID Map Select i P101 3 Press PARAMETER B gt until MIDI Program Map 2 P102 appears in the display Pis me rm RE ME Bank Select Program Patch d Ge Number Number Number 100 P200 101 P200 102 P200 4 Press PARAMETER lt gt to move the cursor and rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to set the received 128 P200 Program number and the corresponding patch number Use this same procedure to select Bank Select Numbers When using only Program Change messages to make program changes without using Bank Select messages set the Program number 1 128 when the Bank Se
283. stalled on your computer use the Control Panel icon Add or Remove Programs to install it For details on installation refer to the Windows manual or Help Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows When playing audio CDs from the computer s internal CD ROM drive or using the GS 10 to play game music Windows XP 2000 users 1 Open the System Properties dialog box Windows XP Click the Windows start button and from the menu that appears select Control Panel Windows 2000 Select Start Settings Control Panel and in the Control Panel double click the System icon Click the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button The Device Manager dialog box will apper In CD ROM drive double click the CD ROM drive that you are using The CD ROM drive s Properties dialog box will appear Click the Properties tab then in Digital CD Playback check the Enable digital CD audio for this CD ROM device item Windows Me users 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and in Control Panel double click the System icon The System Properties dialog box will appear Double click the CD ROM icon and then double click the CD ROM drive that you are using The CD ROM drive s Properties dialog box will appear Click the Properties tab then in Digital CD Playback check the Enable digital CD audio for this CD ROM device item Windows 98 users 1 Select Start Settings Contro
284. stem BOSS GS 10 In the Sound Effects tab set Play alerts and sound effects through to GS 10 Now try clicking on an alert in the list If the sound of the alert comes from the GS 10 when you do so it means that the GS 10 is being recognized and that the driver has been installed properly reo Sound CO A e aU Show All Displays Sound Network Startup Disk Sound Effects Output Input Choose an alert sound Name Kind Basso Built in M Blow Built in Bottle Built in Frog Built in Funk Built in Play alerts and sound effects through GS 10 zz Alert volume mf 1 W Play user interface sound effects vi Play feedback when volume keys are pressed Output volume ag wm Mute v Show volume in menu bar 160 you Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to other devices NEM This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally Nei Once set this way all sounds from your Macintosh including audio alerts will be output only through the GS 10 not from the speakers of your Macintosh 8 9 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh In the Output tab set Choose a device for sound output to GS 10 E eo Sou
285. sting the Recording Level Output Level E 78 Adjusting the Playback Volume Level Ben EE 8 Enabling and Disabling the Direct Monitor Command 79 Switching the Output Signals Direct Montor i eranan esras a tta odes 79 Setting the Output Mode sese 79 Switching the Driver Mode diete 80 Recording the GS 10 s Output witha Computer oibus detti oe ei ila 81 Applying Effects with the GS 10 to a Computer s Audio Playback 81 Running the GS 10 from a Computer 81 Using the GS 10 As a MIDI Interface 81 IT TER 82 About MIDI 82 How MIDI messages are transmitted and TECCIVEd Res 82 Main types of MIDI message used by the GS 1 E 82 About the MIDI implementation 83 About BE 83 Error Messa CS sini 83 Pate M Leier eege 84 Restoring the Factory Settings He e e d D 86 EE 86 Roland Exclusive Messages eere 87 MIDI Implementation eres eese eee aea aene 89 MIDI Implementation Chart 122 Specifications anale 123 Installing amp Setup the USB Driver 125 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows 126 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh 146 Setting the Special Driver s Functions 1
286. tack P121 CRUNCH ROTARY A Crunch Crunch Crunch P122 CLASSIC TRIO A Clean TWIN MS1959 I II R FIER Red P123 OC FUZZ MUFF FUZZ A MS1959 I BG Lead Power Stack P124 3 CHANNEL TWIN A Clean TWIN Clean TWIN Clean TWIN P125 CREAMED MS1959 A Wild Crunch MS1959 I II MS1959 II P126 CRUNCHY STRAT Blues OD A Warm Clean Clean TWIN Pro Crunch P127 FLANGE ME OUT A Clean TWIN Crunch Smooth Drive P128 DS 1 STANDARD Distortion A MS1959 I Drive Stack Drive Stack P129 DOTTED 8th DELAY A Warm Clean Tweed Full Range P130 FAT CRUNCH A Wild Crunch Fat MATCH SLDN P131 FEEDBACK A Crunch R FIER Red R FIER Red P132 FRETLESS SOLO A Mic Preamp BASS 360 Warm Clean P133 1968 80 for LP A VO Drive MS1959 1 MS1959 1 P134 GS PAD C Full Range Clean TWIN Warm Clean P135 HARMONYMAN in Am A Warm Clean Wild Crunch MS1959 I II P136 NATURAL CRUNCH Natural OD A Blues T Amp Clean Drive Stack P137 HUM gt ACOUSTIC C Full Range Full Range Full Range P138 HARD ROCK70s 90s A MS HiGain BG Lead 5150 Drive P139 HEAVY RIFF A R FIER Vint R FIER Orng R FIER Red P140 HiGAIN BG LEAD A BG Rhythm BG Drive BG Lead P141 HIT E5 CHORD Booster A MS1959 I II SLDN BG Drive P142 JAZZY CHORD LP A Warm Clean Jazz Combo JC 120 P143 LOUD LDR LOUDEST A MS1959 I Power Stack R FIER Orng P144 CLASSIC DUDE T Scream A JC 120 VO Drive VO Lead P145 LEGATO MASTER A Clean TWIN Smooth Drive T Amp Lead P146 MAGIC JC A JC 120 JC 120 MS HiGain P147 MATCH ROCK A MATCH Drive Fat
287. talled on this computer appears click FreeMIDI Make sure that Use OMS when available is unchecked in the FreeMIDI Preferences dialog box If it is checked remove the check mark and restart FreeMIDI In the FreeMIDI Preferences dialog box check GS 10 Port which is located below GS 10 Driver in MIDI Configuration and click OK FreeMIDI Preferences Software Compatibility FreeMIDI applications only MIDI Configuration GS 10 Driver Allow other applications FA GS 10 Port O Use OMS when available Applications M Always load at startup O Inter application MIDI SE QuickTime O Built In i Use the MIDI Configuration check boxes to i enable or disable a port for MIDI i i necessary newly added ports will be scanned i i for interfaces automatically To disable a port i temporarily use the Interface Settings dialog i Cancel fthe dialog box does not show GS 10 Driver check whether the GS 10 is connected correctly and start up FreeMIDI Setup once again vote Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to other devices MEM This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally 151 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Macintosh The About
288. tate the PATCH V ALUE dial to specify the range of settings you want to restore to factory settings System System parameters Harmonist scales Auto Riff phrases and Preamp Speaker Overdrive Distortion and Wah Custom Edit parameter settings U001 U100 Settings for Patch Number U001 through U100 4 If you want to proceed with the factory reset press ENTER The specified range of data will be returned and return to the Play screen Tuner Tuner Pitch Tuner Output Output Select OUTPUT Select Direct Patch Direct Patch 1 2 3 4 System LCD Contrast Patch Extent Assign Hold Knob Mode EXP PDL Func CTL1 Func CTL2 Func MIDI RX Channel Omni Mode TX Channel Device ID Sync Clock Remote Ctrl KnobCtrlOut PC Out EXP PDL Out CTL1 Out CTL2 Out Map Select USB Output Level Input Level Monitor Cmd Dir Monitor Output Mode Driver Mode Std Drv Func Others Speaker ON OFF Mic Gain A 440 Hz Bypass Line Phones U001 U002 U003 U004 16 P200 On Immediate Auto Assign 1 8 Assign 1 8 Omni On Rx 17 Auto Advanced On On CC 7 Off Off 100 100 Disable On Stereo L R Advanced Audio ON 50 Roland Exclusive Messages 1 Data Format for Exclusive Messages Roland s MIDI implementation uses the following data format for all Exclusive messages type IV FOH Exclusive Status 41H Manufacturer ID Roland DEV Device ID MDL Model ID
289. tems Click the Windows Start button and select Settings Control Panel to open the Control Panel In Control Panel double click System to open the System Properties dialog box Click the Device Manager tab Double click System Devices to display the list of devices From the list select Advanced Power Management Support Then click Properties to open the Advanced Power Management Support Properties dialog box Click the Settings tab and in Troubleshooting place a check in the check box for Don t Poll Power Supply Status Then click OK In the System Properties dialog box click OK Restart Windows Windows d If you are using the special driver you can solve this problem in the BOSS GS 10 Driver Settings dialog box For details refer to the section Something is wrong with playback sound is interrupted or notes are missing within the Readme e file located in the folder in which you installed the CD ROM M cintosh _1 Depending on the virtual memory setting or network related settings noise may occur Please make the following settings before use In Chooser of the Apple menu set AppleTalk to Inactive This setting is not changed as a result of turning off AppleTalk as requested by OMS when sequencer software is started up You must change the setting yourself using the Chooser In the Memory Control Panel set Virtual Memory to Off Depending on the way in w
290. the Power 1 Before turning off the power confirm the following e Is the volume on the GS 10 your amp and all other connected devices turned down to the minimum level 2 Turn off the power to guitar amp and audio devices 3 Turn the GS 10 s power off Using the GS 10 s Speakers Press SPEAKER ON OFF causing the indicator to light PATCH VALUE AUX INPUT OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL O DO 4 PARAMETER P SPRAKE R LJ C m L JUMP EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM DIRECT PATCH 1 2 4 TUNER O LCE al el When not using the GS 10 s speakers press SPEAKER ON OFF so the indicator is off Adjusting the Output Level Adjust the GS 10 s output level and speaker volume with the OUTPUT LEVEL knob LEVEL LEVEL Cy C SPEAKER ON OFF PATCH VALUE AUX INPUT OUTPUT 4 PARAMETER P CJ L JUMP EXIT WRITE METER SYSTEM DIRECT PATCH TUNER 1 2 3 4 O LEN il el el Chapter 1 Playing Sounds Setting Output Device Combo Return Am p s OUTPUT SE LECT Use this setting when connecting to RETURN with a combo amp Select the type of output device connected to the OUTPUT Stack Return jack or GUITAR AMP OUT jack Use this setting when connecting to RETURN of a stack amp or rack mounted power amp To derive the maximum performance from the GS 10 be sure to make the correct setting for OUTPUT SELECT 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen h hat itable f SE EE
291. to Nem In this manual the location of folders and files is given in terms of the file path using as the delimiter For example ME98 SETUPINF EXE indicates the SETUPINF EXE file found in the ME98 folder yon Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to other devices yon This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally 135 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows Installing the OS standard driver The installation procedure will differ depending on your system Please proceed to one of the following sections depending on the system you use e Windows XP 2000 USCIS 0000000000000 p 136 e Windows Me users p 137 e Windows 98 users p 138 Windows XP 2000 users With the GS 10 disconnected start up Windows Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse if used Exit all currently running software applications Also close any open windows If you are using virus checking or similar software be sure to exit it as well Before connecting the USB cable switch the GS 10 s driver mode to Standard For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 With the
292. to set the USB input level p 78 Chapter 2 Creating Your Own Favorite Tones Patches USB Bass You can add effects to the signals input from the USB connector for sounds in the bass and similar registers Signals from GUITAR BASS INPUT and MIC INPUT are disregarded and the signals input to the GS 10 from the AUX INPUT connector are mixed with the effect output DIGITAL USB OUT EFFECTS After setting INPUT SELECT to USB Bass you can press PARAMETER Be to set the USB input level p 78 AUX This setting is used when selecting the input signal from the AUX INPUT connector Signals input from the GUITAR BASS INPUT and MIC INPUT are disregarded and the signals input to the GS 10 via USB are mixed with the effect output DIGITAL OUT USB GUITAR BASS O 6 wood i INPUT d AUX INPUT O Setting the Mic Input Level MIC GAIN This sets the mic input level when INPUT SELECT is set to Microphone The mic gain setting is a global setting used by all patches 1 Press PARAMETER b gt The MIC GAIN settings screen appears in the display 2 Adjust the gain by turning the PATCH VALUE dial while picking up sounds with the mic Adjust the level so that the level meter does not fluctuate beyond the maximum allowable level Set the volume for the sound being miked acoustic guitar vocals etc to the level to be used in performance Setting the mic gain too high may r
293. trument the receiving device whose channel matches the channel of the transmitter Tf omni mode is on data of all MIDI channels will be received regardless of the MIDI channel setting If you do not need to control a specific MIDI channel you may set Omni On Main types of MIDI message used by the GS 10 MIDI includes many types of MIDI messages that can convey a variety of information MIDI messages can be broadly divided into two types messages that are handled separately by MIDI channel channel messages and messages that are handled without reference to a MIDI channel system messages Channel messages These messages are used to convey performance information Normally these messages perform most of the control The way in which a receiving device will react to each type of MIDI message will be determined by the settings of the receiving device Program change messages These messages are generally used to select sounds and include a program change number from 1 to 128 which specifies the desired sound The GS 10 also allows you to select any of the 200 different patch numbers in conjunction with bank select messages a type of control change message Control change messages These messages are used to enhance the expressiveness of a performance Each message includes a controller number and the settings of the receiving device will determine what aspect of the sound will be affected by control change messages of a gi
294. ttings that match the tempo of the song synchronizing the time to twice or four times the time length of the BPM when the set time is increased When setting to BPM press PARAMETER p to display the Master BPM settings screen Feedback This adjusts the feedback amount of the pitch shift sound Level Adjusts the volume Direct Level This adjusts the volume of the direct sound OC Octave This adds a note one octave lower creating a richer sound Parameter Value Range Range 1 Range A Octave Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 Range This selects the pitch range for the input sound to which you want to add the effects The range to which the affect is applied changes with the Input Select p 19 value Guitar Microphone Bass USB Gtr Mic USB AUX Ranae 1 7th string open B to Low B open B to Je 1st string 24th fret E High C 24th fret C 7th string open B to Low B open B to 1st 1st string 12th fret E string 19th fret C 7th string open B to Low B open B to 1st Ist string open E string 9th fret E Ranae 4 7th string open B to Low B open B to 2nd j Ath string 2nd fret E string 2nd fret E Octave Level This adjusts the volume of the sound one octave below Direct Level Adjusts the volume of the direct sound PB Pedal Bend This lets you use the pedal to get a pitch bend effect The expression pedal automatically swit
295. udio signals at this point is shown in the figure on p 19 p 20 Note In this mode set the software so that audio is not transmitted through not set to Thru Running the GS 10 from a Computer You can use USB MIDI to run the GS 10 from your computer When you set the GS 10 to the Advanced driver mode p 126 p 146 the MIDI connectors used for operation of the GS 10 switches from MIDI IN OUT connectors to the USB driver s GS 10 Control MIDI ports Set your editor and sequencer MIDI input and output ports to GS 10 Control For more on MIDI related settings refer to Chapter 8 Using the GS 10 with External MIDI Devices Connected p 68 Using the GS 10 As a MIDI Interface When the GS 10 is set to the Advanced driver mode p 126 p 146 and connected via USB you can use the GS 10 s MIDI IN and OUT connectors to connect your computer to external MIDI devices Set the input and output ports used for the computer s MIDI applications to GS 10 MIDI In Out 81 Appendices About MIDI MIDI is an acronym for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and is a world wide standard for allowing electronic musical equipment to communicate by transmitting messages such as performance information and sound selections Any MIDI equipped device is able to transmit applicable types of data to another MIDI equipped device even if the two devices are different models or were made by different manufacturers
296. ue click STOP Installation or OK to begin the driver installation over again from Step 1 The Insert Disk dialog box will appear MEMO The Insert Disk dialog may not Insert Disk nsert Dis appear In that case proceed to Please insert the Compact Disc labeled BOSS GS 10 f Driver Installation disk into your CD ROM drive D and i step 17 then click OK You can also click OK if you want files to be copied from an alternate location such as a floppy disk or a network server 16 Click OK The Files Needed dialog box will appear 129 Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows 17 Input the following into the Copy files from field and click OK D DRIVER USB_XP2k The drive name D may be different for your system Specify the drive name of your CD ROM drive Files Needed The file Rd4t1030 DAT on BOSS GS 10 Driver i Installation disk is needed Type the path where the file is located and then click OK Cancel Copy files from DADRIVERMUSB_XP2K If the What action do you want Windows to take setting in step 4 was not set to Ignore a Hardware Installation dialog box will appear Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware BOSS GS 10 MME has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair o
297. und then send the square waveform 11 from the internal sound generator Saw The unit detects the pitch and attack information from the input guitar sound then send the saw waveform from the internal sound generator Brass The unit directly processes the input guitar sound and creates a guitar synthesizer sound It gives a quick sound rise and send the sound with a sharp edge Bow The unit directly processes the input guitar sound and creates a guitar synthesizer sound It outputs a soft sound without attack Chromatic This switches on or off the chromatic function When it is on the pitch change of the synthesizer sound is in semitone steps This does not respond to pitch changes less than a semitone such as what might be obtained with bending or vibrato Thus this is effectively used for realistically playing musical instruments whose pitch will change in steps greater than a semitone such as a keyboard Use this parameter when Square or Saw is selected for Wace Octave Shift This allows you to shift the pitch of the internal sound module in an octave step from the guitar sound This parameter should be set when Square or Saw is selected for the wave PWM Rate Pulse Wise Modulation Rate This gives breadth or fatness to the sound by applying modulation to the waveform only to Square in the internal sound module A higher value will quicken the rate of the modulation This p
298. und being input to each effect is called the direct sound and the sound modified by the effect is called the effect sound Setting values for gain and volume related parameters in the effects too high may result in oscillation To derive the maximum performance from the GS 10 be sure to make the correct setting for INPUT SELECT p 19 the one that s most suitable for your setup You may not be able to achieve the expected effect if this is not set correctly Depending on the type of bass guitar you are using you may not be able to achieve the intended effect if the input level to the GS 10 is excessively high In such cases lower the volume or tone of your bass guitar The trademarks listed in this document are trademarks of their respective owners which are separate companies from BOSS Those companies are not affiliated with BOSS and have not licensed or authorized BOSS s GS 10 Their marks are used solely to identify the equipment whose sound is simulated by BOSS s GS 10 PREAMP SPEAKER Preamp Speaker Simulator COSM technology plays an indispensable role in simulating the distinguishing characteristics of various guitar amps in the Preamp section and is also used to simulate various speaker sizes and cabinet constructions in the Speaker Simulator Parameter Value On Off Off On CH Select A B C Type refer to p 29 Gain 0 120 Bass 0 100 Middle 0 100 Treble 0 100 Presen
299. ve or distortion LEVEL Knob Adjusts the overdrive distortion volume level OD DS On Off Button Press to change the settings DELAY p 21 p 33 FEEDBACK Knob Adjusts the number of times the delay is repeated LEVEL Knob Adjusts the volume level of the delay sound DELAY On Off Button Press to change the settings Panel Descriptions 9 P cd TAP Button Use this when setting the delay time with the tap input p 33 CHORUS p 21 p 34 LEVEL Knob Adjusts the volume level of the chorus sound CHORUS On Off Button Press to change the settings REVERB p 21 p 34 LEVEL Knob Adjusts the volume level of the reverb sound REVERB On Off Button Press to change the settings FX 1 p 36 FX 1 On Off Button Press to change the settings FX 2 p 41 FX 2 On Off Button Press to change the settings EQ Equalizer p 35 EQ On Off Button Press when changing the settings NAME NS MASTER Button p 24 p 53 Use for naming patches NAME setting the noise suppressor NS and making the master settings MASTER ASSIGN Button p 60 Use this to make settings for the expression pedal and control pedal INPUT SELECT Button Selects the input signal to which the effect is applied QUICK FX Button p 22 Using the Quick Settings lets you complete the settings procedure quickly and easily PATCH VALUE Dial Use this when switching patches and changing the values
300. ven controller number The specified parameters can be controlled with the GS 10 System messages System messages include exclusive messages messages used for synchronization and messages used to keep a MIDI system running correctly Exclusive messages Exclusive messages handle information related to a unit s own unique sounds or other device specific information Generally such messages can only be exchanged between devices of the same model by the same manufacturer Exclusive messages can be employed to save the settings for effects programs into a sequencer or for transferring such data to another GS 10 The two instruments must be set to the same device ID numbers when exchanging SysEx messages Appendices About the MIDI implementation MIDI allows a variety of messages to be exchanged between instruments but it is not necessarily the case that all types of message can be exchanged between any two MIDI devices Two devices can communicate only if they both use the types of messages that they have in common Thus every owner s manual for a MIDI device includes a MIDI Implementation Chart This chart shows the types of message that the device is able to transmit and receive By comparing the MIDI implementation charts of two devices you can tell at a glance which messages they will be able to exchange Since the charts are always of a uniform size you can simply place the two charts side by side Fold here 7
301. will open it for you Cancel Browse The SetupInf dialog box will appear with Ready to install the driver appearing in the box If a message prompting you to restart Windows appears restart Windows in accordance with the message instructions then proceed to the following step x DO E Ready to install the driver Please connectthe device The driver will be installed automatically when you connect the device Click the OK button in this dialog box The setup program will close Before connecting the USB cable switch the GS 10 s driver mode to Advanced For instructions on switching the GS 10 s driver modes refer to Switching the Driver Mode p 80 With the power switch turned OFF use the USB cable to connect the GS 10 to your computer Make sure that the GS 10 s OUTPUT LEVEL is set to the lowest setting then switch ON the POWER switch The driver is installed automatically Click OK If a message prompting you to restart Windows appears restart Windows in accordance with the message instructions Next you need to make the driver settings p 141 you If the GS 10 is already connected to your computer and a message of Add New Hardware Wizard is displayed go to the included CD ROM folder named DRIVER USB_XP2k open the file Readme e htm and read the Troubleshooting section entitled You attempted to install using the above procedure but were not able ZE
302. xpression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit When using the unit with a foot switch FS 5U optional connected to the EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 jack set the polarity switch as shown below Polarity Switch You can use the special optional Roland PCS 31 connector cord to connect two foot switches PCS 31 When using the unit with a foot switch the optional FS 5U connected to the EXP PEDAL CTL 1 2 jack make the settings given on p 59 Turning On the Power Once the connections have been completed turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices 1 Before turning on the power confirm the following e Areallexternal devices properly connected e Is the volume on the GS 10 your amp and all other connected devices turned down to the minimum level 2 Switch ON the POWER switch on the GS 10 s rear panel A few seconds later the unit enters the ordinary performance mode The screen that appears at this point is called the Play screen Upon power up the patch most recently selected when the power was last turned off is selected This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally 3 Next turn on the power to guitar amp and audio devices Turning Off
303. y appear If this occurs click OK and exit the other applications Even if an application window is closed it is still running if it appears in the taskbar Be sure to exit unneeded applications displayed LJ Was the driver installed correctly In order for you to play back audio data via the GS 10 the driver must be installed For installation and settings refer to Installing amp Setting Up the Driver Windows p 126 Macintosh p 146 LJ Is your computer in Suspend or Sleep mode Ifso get your computer to resume normal operation then exit all applications that are using the GS 10 Next turn the GS 10 s power off then switch it on again _1 Did you plug in the USB cable or unplug it while an application was running Exit all applications that are using the GS 10 and exit all applications that are using the GS 10 and re connect the GS 10 LJ Have you selected Game compatible device or Voice modem as the output for the audio track If game compatible device or voice modem the actual name will depend on the computer you are using is selected for the audio track of your software the audio track may not play back Do not select these devices as the port J Has your computer been set to enter Sleep mode If your computer enters Sleep mode exit the software you are using and then restart your computer We recommend that you set your computer to not use Sleep mode Windows J

Boss Audio Systems GS-10 Musical Instrument User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents